WO2009071706A1 - Pyrazolepyrimidine compounds useful for the treatment of degenerative & inflammatory diseases - Google Patents
Pyrazolepyrimidine compounds useful for the treatment of degenerative & inflammatory diseases Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2009071706A1 WO2009071706A1 PCT/EP2008/067047 EP2008067047W WO2009071706A1 WO 2009071706 A1 WO2009071706 A1 WO 2009071706A1 EP 2008067047 W EP2008067047 W EP 2008067047W WO 2009071706 A1 WO2009071706 A1 WO 2009071706A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- compound according
- substituted
- unsubstituted
- alkyl
- methyl
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Ceased
Links
- 0 CC1(C)CC*CC1 Chemical compound CC1(C)CC*CC1 0.000 description 12
Classifications
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
- C07D487/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00
- C07D487/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
- C07D487/04—Ortho-condensed systems
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
Definitions
- the present invention relates to compounds that are inhibitors of PDElA, a phosphodiesterase that is involved in the modulation of the degradation of cartilage, joint degeneration and diseases involving such degradation and/or inflammation.
- Cartilage is an avascular tissue of which chondrocytes are the main cellular component.
- the chondrocytes in normal articular cartilage occupy approximately 5% of the tissue volume, while the extra-cellular matrix makes up the remaining 95% of the tissue.
- the chondrocytes secrete the components of the matrix, mainly proteoglycans and collagens, which in turn supply the chondrocytes with an environment suitable for their survival under mechanical stress.
- collagen type II together with the protein collagen type IX, is arranged in solid fibril-like structures, which provide cartilage with great mechanical strength.
- the proteoglycans can absorb water and are responsible for the resilient and shock absorbing properties of the cartilage.
- cartilage degradation is caused by the secretion of proteases (e.g. collagenases) by inflamed tissues (the inflammed synovium for example).
- cartilage degradation can also be the result of an injury of the cartilage, due to an accident or surgery, or exaggerated loading or 'wear and tear'.
- the ability of cartilage tissue to regenerate after such insults is limited. Chondrocytes in injured cartilage often display reduced cartilage synthesizing (anabolic) activity and/or increased cartilage degrading (catabolic) activity.
- Rheumatoid arthritis is a chronic joint degenerative disease, characterized by inflammation and destruction of the joint structures. When the disease is unchecked, it leads to substantial disability and pain due to loss of joint functionality and even premature death. The aim of an RA therapy, therefore, is not to slow down the disease but to attain remission in order to stop the joint destruction. Besides the severity of the disease outcome, the high prevalence of RA ( ⁇ 0.8% of adults are affected worldwide) means a high socio-economic impact. (For reviews on RA, we refer to Smolen and Steiner (2003); Lee and Weinblatt (2001); Choy and Panayi (2001); O'Dell (2004) and Firestein (2003)).
- Osteoarthritis also referred to as OA, or wear-and-tear arthritis
- OA wear-and-tear arthritis
- the disease mainly affects hands and weight-bearing joints such as knees, hips and spines. This process thins the cartilage.
- grade I osteoarthritis When the surface area has disappeared due to the thinning, a grade I osteoarthritis is reached; when the tangential surface area has disappeared, grade II osteoarthritis is reached.
- grade II osteoarthritis There are further levels of degeneration and destruction, which affect the deep and the calcified cartilage layers that border with the subchondral bone.
- the clinical manifestations of the development of the osteoarthritis condition include: increased volume of the joint, pain, crepitation and functional disability that, lead to pain and reduced mobility of the joints. When disease further develops, pain at rest emerges. If the condition persists without correction and/or therapy, the joint is destroyed leading to disability. Replacement surgery with total prosthesis is then required.
- Osteoarthritis is difficult to treat. At present, no cure is available and treatment focuses on relieving pain and preventing the affected joint from becoming deformed. Common treatments include the use of non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAID 's). Although the dietary supplements as chondroitin and glucosamine sulphate have been advocated as safe and effective options for the treatment of osteoarthritis, a recent clinical trial revealed that both treatments did not reduce pain associated to osteoarthritis. (Clegg et al., 2006). Taken together, no disease modifying osteoarthritic drugs are available.
- NSAID 's non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs
- chondral cellular material is taken from the patient, sent to a laboratory where it is expanded. The material is then implanted in the damaged tissues to cover the tissue's defects.
- Another treatment includes the intra-articular instillation of Hylan G-F 20 (Synvisc,
- Hyalgan, Artz etc. a substance that improves temporarily the rheology of the synovial fluid, producing an almost immediate sensation of free movement and a marked reduction of pain.
- Other reported methods include application of tendinous, periosteal, fascial, muscular or perichondral grafts; implantation of fibrin or cultured chondrocytes; implantation of synthetic matrices, such as collagen, carbon fiber; administration of electromagnetic fields. All of these have reported minimal and incomplete effects, resulting in a poor quality tissue that can neither support the weighted load nor allow the restoration of an articular function with normal movement.
- Stimulation of the anabolic processes, blocking catabolic processes, or a combination of these two, may result in stabilization of the cartilage, and perhaps even reversion of the damage, and therefore prevent further progression of the disease.
- Various triggers may stimulate anabolic stimulation of chondrocytes.
- Insulin- like growth factor-I IGF-I is the predominant anabolic growth factor in synovial fluid and stimulates the synthesis of both proteoglycans and collagen.
- BMP bone morphogenetic protein
- TGF-b human transforming growth factor-b
- Adenosine 3', 5'-cyclic monophosphate (cyclic AMP or cAMP) and guanosine 3', 5'- cyclic monophosphate (cyclic GMP or cGMP) are key second messenger molecules in cells which are synthesized by guanylyl and adenylyl cyclases. These molecules, by playing a role as 'relay' on signal transduction pathways, are key in controlling normal and pathological cell responses. Cyclic nucleotide phosphodiesterases (PDE's) are enzymes that hydrolyse cyclic nucleotides and thereby control the cellular levels of these second messenger molecules. Because of their key role in cellular signaling, PDE's are considered new therapeutic targets.
- PDE's are enzymes that hydrolyse cyclic nucleotides and thereby control the cellular levels of these second messenger molecules. Because of their key role in cellular signaling, PDE's are considered new therapeutic targets.
- PDE4 and PDE5 are accepted approaches for the treatment of asthma/chronic obstructive pulmonary disease and erectile dysfunction, respectively.
- pharmaceutical industry has recently deployed a lot of efforts to develop PDE4 inhibitors (e.g. Cilomilast) and PDE5 inhibitors (e.g. sildenafil), some of which are marketed.
- PDEl enzymes Another feature of PDEl enzymes is their dual substrate specificity as they have the capacity to hydrolyse both cAMP and cGMP (Zhang et al., 2004).
- the generation of transgenic animals represents the best tool for the understanding of the specific physiological role of individual PDEs.
- a PDElB knockout mouse has been generated and characterized.
- PDE1B(-/-) mice showed exaggerated hyperactivity after acute D- methamphetamine administration.
- PDE1B(-/-) and PDE1B(+/-) mice demonstrated spatial-learning deficits.
- the current therapies are not satisfactory and therefore there remains a need to identify further compounds that may be of use in the treatment of degenerative joint diseases, e.g. osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis and osteoporosis.
- the present invention therefore provides compounds, methods for their manufacture and a pharmaceutical comprising a compound of the invention together with a suitable pharmaceutical carrier.
- the present invention also provides for the use of a compound of the invention in the preparation of a medicament for the treatment of degenerative joint diseases.
- the present invention is based on the discovery that inhibitors of PDElA are useful for the treatment of diseases involving cartilage degradation, joint degradation and/or inflammation, for example osteoarthritis.
- the present invention also provides methods for the production of these compounds, pharmaceutical compositions comprising these compounds and methods for treating diseases involving cartilage degradation, joint degradation and/or inflammation by administering a compound of the invention.
- the present invention relates to compounds having anti-inflammatory properties, according to formula (I):
- CyI is substituted or unsubstituted aryl or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl;
- R 1 is H, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl;
- R is H, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkylalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl;
- R 4 is alkyl substituted with halo, alkoxy, aryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl; and ml is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4; provided that when CyI is heterocycloalkyl and the heterocycloalkyl group is joined to -(CH 2 ) m i- via a N atom of heterocycloalkyl group then ml is 2, 3 or 4; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate or prodrug thereof or isotopic variants thereof, stereoisomers or tautomers thereof.
- the compound is according to formulae Ia or Ib:
- Ar is substituted or unsubstituted aryl; and HetAr is substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl.
- R 1 is alkyl. In another embodiment R 1 is Me.
- R 2 is alkyl or cycloalkyl. In another embodiment R is alkyl.
- R 4 is alkyl
- Another aspect of this invention relates to the use of the present compound in a therapeutic method, a pharmaceutical composition, and the manufacture of such composition, useful for the treatment of a disease involving inflammation, and in particular, a disease characteristic of abnormal PDElA activity.
- This invention also relates to processes for the preparation of the present compounds.
- Figure 1 Shows the mechanism of the primary screening assay using the cAMP dynamic htrf kit from Cisbio.
- analogue means one analogue or more than one analogue.
- 'Acyl' or 'Alkanoyl' refers to a radical -C(O)R 20 , where R 20 is hydrogen, Ci-C 8 alkyl, C 3 -
- Representative examples include, but are not limited to, formyl, acetyl, cyclohexylcarbonyl, cyclohexylmethylcarbonyl, benzoyl and benzylcarbonyl.
- Exemplary 'acyl' groups are -C(O)H, -C(O)-Ci-C 8 alkyl, -C(O)-(CH 2 ) t (C 6 -Ci 0 aryl), -C(O)-(CH 2 ) t (5-10 membered heteroaryl), cycloalkyl), and -C(O)-(CH 2 ) t (4- 10 membered heterocycloalkyl), wherein t is an integer from 0 to 4.
- 'Substituted Acyl' or 'Substituted Alkanoyl' refers to a radical -C(O)R 21 , wherein R 21 is independently
- Ci-C 8 alkyl substituted with halo or hydroxy
- 'Acylamino' refers to a radical -NR 22 C(O)R 23 , where R 22 is hydrogen, C r C 8 alkyl, C 3 -
- Exemplary 'acylamino' include, but are not limited to, formylamino, acetylamino, cyclohexylcarbonylamino, cyclohexylmethyl-carbonylamino, benzoylamino and benzylcarbonylamino.
- Exemplary 'acylamino' groups are -NR 21 C(O)-Ci-C 8 alkyl, -NR 21 C(O)-(CH 2 ) t (C 6 -Ci 0 aryl), -NR 21 C(O)-(CH 2 ) t (5-10 membered heteroaryl), -NR 21 C(O)-(CH 2 ) t (C 3 -Ci 0 cycloalkyl), and -NR 21 C(O)-(CH 2 ) ⁇ - 10 membered heterocycloalkyl), wherein t is an integer from 0 to 4, each R 21 independently represents H or Ci-C 8 alkyl.
- 'Substituted Acylamino' refers to a radical -NR 24 C(O)R 25 , wherein:
- R 24 is independently
- R 25 is independently
- alkoxy' refers to the group -OR 26 where R 26 is Ci-Cg alkyl.
- Particular alkoxy groups are methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, tert-butoxy, sec-butoxy, n-pentoxy, n-hexoxy, and 1,2-dimethylbutoxy.
- Particular alkoxy groups are lower alkoxy, i.e. with between 1 and 6 carbon atoms. Further particular alkoxy groups have between 1 and 4 carbon atoms.
- Substituted alkoxy' refers to an alkoxy group substituted with one or more of those groups recited in the definition of "substituted” herein, and particularly refers to an alkoxy group having 1 or more substituents, for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, and particularly from 1 to 3 substituents, in particular 1 substituent, selected from the group consisting of amino, substituted amino, C 6 -Ci 0 aryl, -O- aryl, carboxyl, cyano, C3-C 1 0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, halogen, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, hydroxyl, nitro, thioalkoxy, thio-O-aryl, thiol, alkyl-S(O)-, aryl-S(O)-, alkyl-S(O) 2 - and aryl- S(O) 2 ".
- Exemplary 'substituted alkoxy' groups are -0-(CH 2 ) t (C6-Cio aryl), -O-(CH 2 ) t (5-10 membered heteroaryl), -0-(CH 2 )t(C 3 -Cio cycloalkyl), and -O-(CH 2 ) t (4- 10 membered heterocycloalkyl), wherein t is an integer from 0 to 4 and any aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted Ci-C 4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted Ci-C 4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Ci-C 4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted Ci-C 4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C 4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy.
- Particular exemplary 'substituted alkoxy' groups are OCF 3 , OCH 2 CF 3 , OCH 2 Ph, OCH 2 -cyclopropyl, OCH 2 CH 2 OH, OCH 2 CH 2 NMe 2 .
- Alkoxycarbonyl' refers to a radical -C(O)-OR 27 where R 27 represents an Ci-C 8 alkyl, C 3 -
- alkoxycarbonyl groups are C(O)O-Ci-Cg alkyl, -C(O)O- (CH 2 WC 6 -CiO aryl), -C(O)O-(CH 2 ) t (5-10 membered heteroaryl), -C(O)O-(CH 2 WC 3 -Ci 0 cycloalkyl), and -C(O)O-(CH 2 ) t (4- 10 membered heterocycloalkyl), wherein t is an integer from 1 to 4.
- 'Substituted Alkoxycarbonyl' refers to a radical -C(O)-OR 28 where R 28 represents:
- '-O-arylcarbonyl' refers to a radical -C(O)-OR 29 where R 29 represents an C 6 -Ci 0 aryl, as defined herein.
- R 29 represents an C 6 -Ci 0 aryl, as defined herein.
- Exemplary "-O-arylcarbonyl” groups is -C(O)O-(C 6 -Ci 0 aryl).
- Substituted -O-arylcarbonyl' refers to a radical -C(O)-OR 30 where R 30 represents a
- Hetero-O-arylcarbonyl' refers to a radical -C(O)-OR 31 where R 31 represents a 5-10 membered heteroaryl, as defined herein
- 'Substituted Hetero-O-arylcarbonyl' refers to a radical -C(O)-OR 32 where R 32 represents a:
- 'Alkyl' means straight or branched aliphatic hydrocarbon having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
- Particular alkyl has 1 to 12 carbon atoms. More particular is lower alkyl which has 1 to 6 carbon atoms. A further particular group has 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
- Exemplary straight chained groups include methyl, ethyl n-propyl, and n-butyl. Branched means that one or more lower alkyl groups such as methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl is attached to a linear alkyl chain, exemplary branched chain groups include isopropyl, iso-butyl, t-butyl and isoamyl.
- Substituted alkyl' refers to an alkyl group as defined above substituted with one or more of those groups recited in the definition of "substituted” herein, and particularly refers to an alkyl group having 1 or more substituents, for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, and particularly from 1 to 3 substituents, in particular 1 substituent, selected from the group consisting of acyl, acylamino, acyloxy (- O-acyl or -OC(O)R 20 ), alkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylamino (-NR -alkoxycarbonyl or -NH- C(O)-OR 27 ), amino, substituted amino, aminocarbonyl (carbamoyl or amido or -C(O)-NR 2 ), aminocarbonylamino (-NR -C(O)-NR 2 ), aminocarbonyloxy (-O-C(O)-NR 2) , aminosulfonyl
- 'substituted alkyl' refers to a Ci-Cg alkyl group substituted with halo, cyano, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, azido, -NR " SO 2 R “ , -SO 2 NR “ R “ , -C(O)R “ , -C(O)OR “ , -OC(O)R “ , - NR '” C(O)R “ , -C(O)NR R “ , -NR “ R “ , or -(CR '” R “” ) m OR " ; wherein each R " is independently selected from H, Ci-C 8 alkyl, -(CH 2 XC 6 -Ci 0 aryl), -(CH 2 ) t (5-10 membered heteroaryl), -(CH 2 XC 3 -Ci 0 cycloalkyl), and -(CH 2 ) t (4- 10
- 'Amino' refers to the radical -NH 2 .
- 'Substituted amino' refers to an amino group substituted with one or more of those groups recited in the definition of 'substituted' herein, and particularly refers to the group -N(R ) 2 where each R 33 is independently selected from:
- Ci-C 8 alkyl substituted with halo or hydroxy
- -N(R 33 ) 2 is an amino group.
- exemplary 'substituted amino' groups are -NR 33' -C r C 8 alkyl, -NR 33' -(CH 2 ) t (C 6 -Ci 0 aryl), -NR 33' -(CH 2 ) t (5-10 membered heteroaryl), -NR 33' -(CH 2 ) t (C 3 -Ci 0 cycloalkyl), and -NR 33' -(CH 2 ) t (4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl), wherein t is an integer from 0 to 4, each R independently represents H or Ci-
- Cg alkyl; and any alkyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by halo, substituted or unsubstituted amino, or hydroxy; and any aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted Ci-C 4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted Ci-C 4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Ci-C 4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted Ci-C 4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C 4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy.
- substituted amino includes the groups alkylamino, substituted alkylamino, alkylarylamino, substituted alkylarylamino, arylamino, substituted arylamino, dialkylamino and substituted dialkylamino as defined below.
- 'Alkylamino' refers to the group -NHR 34 , wherein R 34 is Ci-C 8 alkyl.
- Substituted Alkylamino' refers to the group -NHR 35 , wherein R 35 is Ci-C 8 alkyl; and the alkyl group is substituted with halo, substituted or unsubstituted amino, hydroxy, C 3 -Ci 0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C 6 -Ci 0 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, aralkyl or heteroaralkyl; and any aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted Ci-C 4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted Ci-C 4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Ci-C 4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted
- Ci-C 4 hydroxyalkyl or unsubstituted Ci-C 4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy.
- Alkylarylamino' refers to the group -NR 36 R 37 , wherein R 36 is C 6 -Ci 0 aryl and R 37 is C r
- Substituted Alkylarylamino' refers to the group -NR 38 R 39 , wherein R 38 is C 6 -Ci 0 aryl and
- R 39 is Ci-C 8 alkyl; and the alkyl group is substituted with halo, substituted or unsubstituted amino, hydroxy, C 3 -Ci 0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C 6 -Ci 0 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, aralkyl or heteroaralkyl; and any aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted Ci-C 4 alkyl, halo, cyano, unsubstituted Ci-C 4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Ci-C 4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted Ci-C 4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C 4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy.
- 'Arylamino' means a radical -NHR 40 where R 40 is selected from C 6 -Ci 0 aryl and 5-10 membered heteroaryl as defined herein.
- 'Substituted Arylamino' refers to the group -NHR 41 , wherein R 41 is independently selected from C 6 -Ci 0 aryl and 5-10 membered heteroaryl; and any aryl or heteroaryl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted Ci-C 4 alkyl, halo, cyano, unsubstituted Ci-C 4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Ci-C 4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted Ci-C 4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C 4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy.
- 'Dialkylamino' refers to the group -NR 42 R 43 , wherein each of R 42 and R 43 are independently selected from Ci-C 8 alkyl.
- Dialkylamino' refers to the group -NR 44 R 45 , wherein each of R 44 and R 45 are independently selected from Ci-C 8 alkyl; and the alkyl group is independently substituted with halo, hydroxy, C3-C 1 0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C 6 -Ci 0 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, aralkyl or heteroaralkyl; and any aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted C 1 -C 4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, unsubstituted
- 'Diarylamino' refers to the group -NR 46 R 47 , wherein each of R 46 and R 47 are independently selected from C 6 -Ci 0 aryl.
- aminosulfonyl or “Sulfonamide” refers to the radical -S(O 2 )NH 2 .
- Substituted aminosulfonyl or “substituted sulfonamide” refers to a radical such as -
- each R 48 is independently selected from:
- Ci-C 8 alkyl C 3 -Ci 0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C 6 -Ci 0 aryl, aralkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, and heteroaralkyl; or
- 'Aralkyl' or 'arylalkyP refers to an alkyl group, as defined above, substituted with one or more aryl groups, as defined above. Particular aralkyl or arylalkyl groups are alkyl groups substituted with one aryl group.
- 'Substituted Aralkyl' or 'substituted arylalkyl' refers to an alkyl group, as defined above, substituted with one or more aryl groups; and at least one of any aryl group present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted Ci-C 4 alkyl, halo, cyano, unsubstituted Ci-C 4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Ci-C 4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted Ci-C 4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C 4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy.
- 'Aryl' refers to a monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon group derived by the removal of one hydrogen atom from a single carbon atom of a parent aromatic ring system.
- aryl refers to an aromatic ring structure, mono-cyclic or poly-cyclic that includes from 5 to 12 ring members, more usually 6 to 10. Where the aryl group is a monocyclic ring system it preferentially contains 6 carbon atoms.
- Typical aryl groups include, but are not limited to, groups derived from aceanthrylene, acenaphthylene, acephenanthrylene, anthracene, azulene, benzene, chrysene, coronene, fluoranthene, fluorene, hexacene, hexaphene, hexalene, as-indacene, s-indacene, indane, indene, naphthalene, octacene, octaphene, octalene, ovalene, penta-2,4-diene, pentacene, pentalene, pentaphene, perylene, phenalene, phenanthrene, picene, pleiadene, pyrene, pyranthrene, rubicene, triphenylene and trinaphthalene.
- Particularly aryl groups include phenyl
- 'Substituted Aryl' refers to an aryl group substituted with one or more of those groups recited in the definition of 'substituted' herein, and particularly refers to an aryl group that may optionally be substituted with 1 or more substituents, for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, particularly 1 to 3 substituents, in particular 1 substituent.
- 'Substituted Aryl' refers to an aryl group substituted with one or more of groups selected from halo, Ci-C 8 alkyl, Ci-C 8 haloalkyl, Ci-C 8 haloalkoxy, cyano, hydroxy, Ci-C 8 alkoxy, and amino.
- Examples of representative substituted aryls include the following
- R 49 and R 50 may be hydrogen and at least one of R 49 and R 50 is each independently selected from Ci-C 8 alkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, alkanoyl, Ci-C 8 alkoxy, hetero-O-aryl, alkylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, NR 51 COR 52 , NR 51 SOR 52 NR 51 SO 2 R 52 , COOalkyl,
- COOaryl CONR 51 R 52 , CONR 51 OR 52 , NR 51 R 52 , SO 2 NR 51 R 52 , S-alkyl, SOalkyl, S0 2 alkyl, Saryl, SOaryl,
- R 49 and R 50 may be joined to form a cyclic ring (saturated or unsaturated) from 5 to 8 atoms, optionally containing one or more heteroatoms selected from the group N, O or S.
- R 51 , and R 52 are independently hydrogen, Ci-C 8 alkyl, C 1 -C 4 haloalkyl, C3-C 1 0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C 6 -Ci 0 aryl, substituted aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl.
- Arylalkyloxy' refers to an -O-alkylaryl radical where alkylaryl is as defined herein.
- Arylalkyloxy refers to an -O-alkylaryl radical where alkylaryl is as defined herein; and any aryl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted Ci-C 4 alkyl, halo, cyano, unsubstituted Ci-C 4 alkoxy, unsubstituted C r4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted Ci-C 4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C 4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy.
- 'Azido' refers to the radical -N 3 .
- Carbamoyl or amido' refers to the radical -C(O)NH 2 .
- 'Substituted Carbamoyl or substituted amido' refers to the radical -C(O)N(R 5 ) 2 wherein each R 53 is independently
- Ci-C 8 alkyl C 3 -Ci 0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C 6 -Ci 0 aryl, aralkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, and heteroaralkyl; or
- Ci-C 8 alkyl substituted with halo or hydroxy or • C3-C 1 0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C ⁇ -Cio aryl, aralkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or heteroaralkyl, each of which is substituted by unsubstituted C 1 -C 4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted Ci-C 4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Ci-C 4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted Ci-C 4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C 4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy; provided that at least one R 53 is other than H.
- Exemplary 'Substituted Amido / Carbamoyl' groups are -C(O) NR 53' -C r C 8 alkyl, -C(O)NR 53' - (CH 2 WC 6 -CiO aryl), -C(O)N 53' -(CH 2 ) t (5-10 membered heteroaryl), -C(O)NR 53' -(CH 2 ) t (C 3 -Ci 0 cycloalkyl), and -C(O)NR 5 -(CH 2 ) t (4- 10 membered heterocycloalkyl), wherein t is an integer from 0 to 4, each R 53 independently represents H or Ci-Cg alkyl and any aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted Ci-C 4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted Ci-C 4 alkoxy, unsub
- 'Cycloalkyl' refers to cyclic non-aromatic hydrocarbyl groups having from 3 to 10 carbon atoms.
- Such cycloalkyl groups include, by way of example, single ring structures such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, and cyclooctyl.
- 'Substituted cycloalkyl' refers to a cycloalkyl group as defined above substituted with one or more of those groups recited in the definition of 'substituted' herein, and particularly refers to a cycloalkyl group having 1 or more substituents, for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, and particularly from 1 to 3 substituents, in particular 1 substituent.
- 'Cyano' refers to the radical -CN.
- 'Halo' or 'halogen' refers to fluoro (F), chloro (Cl), bromo (Br) and iodo (I). Particular halo groups are either fluoro or chloro.
- Hetero when used to describe a compound or a group present on a compound means that one or more carbon atoms in the compound or group have been replaced by a nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur heteroatom. Hetero may be applied to any of the hydrocarbyl groups described above such as alkyl, e.g. heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, e.g. heterocycloalkyl, aryl, e.g. heteroaryl, cycloalkenyl, e.g. cycloheteroalkenyl, and the like having from 1 to 5, and particularly from 1 to 3 heteroatoms.
- Heteroaryl' means an aromatic ring structure, mono-cyclic or polycyclic, that includes one or more heteroatoms and 5 to 12 ring members, more usually 5 to 10 ring members.
- the heteroaryl group can be, for example, a five membered or six membered monocyclic ring or a bicyclic structure formed from fused five and six membered rings or two fused six membered rings or, by way of a further example, two fused five membered rings.
- Each ring may contain up to four heteroatoms typically selected from nitrogen, sulphur and oxygen.
- the heteroaryl ring will contain up to 4 heteroatoms, more typically up to 3 heteroatoms, more usually up to 2, for example a single heteroatom.
- the heteroaryl ring contains at least one ring nitrogen atom.
- the nitrogen atoms in the heteroaryl rings can be basic, as in the case of an imidazole or pyridine, or essentially non-basic as in the case of an indole or pyrrole nitrogen. In general the number of basic nitrogen atoms present in the heteroaryl group, including any amino group substituents of the ring, will be less than five.
- Examples of five membered monocyclic heteroaryl groups include but are not limited to pyrrole, furan, thiophene, imidazole, furazan, oxazole, oxadiazole, oxatriazole, isoxazole, thiazole, isothiazole, pyrazole, triazole and tetrazole groups.
- Examples of six membered monocyclic heteroaryl groups include but are not limited to pyridine, pyrazine, pyridazine, pyrimidine and triazine.
- bicyclic heteroaryl groups containing a five membered ring fused to another five membered ring include but are not limited to imidazothiazole and imidazoimidazole.
- bicyclic heteroaryl groups containing a six membered ring fused to a five membered ring include but are not limited to benzfuran, benzthiophene, benzimidazole, benzoxazole, isobenzoxazole, benzisoxazole, benzthiazole, benzisothiazole, isobenzofuran, indole, isoindole, isoindolone, indolizine, indoline, isoindoline, purine (e.g., adenine, guanine), indazole, pyrazolopyrimidine, triazolopyrimidine, benzodioxole and pyrazolopyridine groups.
- bicyclic heteroaryl groups containing two fused six membered rings include but are not limited to quinoline, isoquinoline, chroman, thiochroman, chromene, isochromene, chroman, isochroman, benzodioxan, quinolizine, benzoxazine, benzodiazine, pyridopyridine, quinoxaline, quinazoline, cinnoline, phthalazine, naphthyridine and pteridine groups.
- Particular heteroaryl groups are those derived from thiophene, pyrrole, benzothiophene, benzofuran, indole, pyridine, quinoline, imidazole, oxazole and pyrazine.
- Examples of representative aryl having hetero atoms containing substitution include the following:
- each W is selected from C(R , 5 3 4 4 ⁇ ⁇ , NR , 5 3 4 4 , O and S; and each Y is selected from carbonyl, NR 54 , O and S; and R 54 is independently hydrogen, Ci-Cg alkyl, C3-C 1 0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C 6 -Ci 0 aryl, and 5-10 membered heteroaryl.
- heteroaryls include the following: wherein each Y is selected from carbonyl, N, NR 55 , O and S; and R 55 is independently hydrogen, Ci-C 8 alkyl, C 3 -Ci 0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C 6 -Ci 0 aryl, and 5-10 membered heteroaryl.
- R 55 is independently hydrogen, Ci-C 8 alkyl, C 3 -Ci 0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C 6 -Ci 0 aryl, and 5-10 membered heteroaryl.
- the term 'heterocycloalkyl' refers to a 4-10 membered, stable heterocyclic non-aromatic ring and/or including rings containing one or more heteroatoms independently selected from N, O and S, fused thereto.
- a fused heterocyclic ring system may include carbocyclic rings and need only include one heterocyclic ring.
- heterocyclic rings include, but are not limited to, morpholine, piperidine (e.g. 1 -piperidinyl, 2-piperidinyl, 3-piperidinyl and 4-piperidinyl), pyrrolidine (e.g.
- thiomorpholine and its S-oxide and S,S-dioxide particularly thiomorpholine
- Still further examples include azetidine, piperidone, piperazone, and N-alkyl piperidines such as N-methyl piperidine.
- heterocycloalkyl groups are shown in the following illustrative examples:
- each W is selected from CR ) 56 , / C ⁇ v( ⁇ R) 56' ) 2 , NR , O and S; and each Y is selected from NR , O and S; and R 56 is independently hydrogen, Ci-C 8 alkyl, C 3 -Ci 0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C ⁇ -Cio aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, These heterocycloalkyl rings may be optionally substituted with one or more groups selected from the group consisting of acyl, acylamino, acyloxy (-O-acyl or - OC(O)R 20 ), alkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylamino (-NR -alkoxycarbonyl or -NH-C(O)-OR 27 ), amino, substituted amino, aminocarbonyl (amido or -C(O)-NR 2 ), aminocarbonylamino (-NR -C(
- 'Nitro' refers to the radical -NO 2 .
- 'Substituted' refers to a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms are each independently replaced with the same or different substituent(s).
- substituted groups are substituted with one or more substituents, particularly with 1 to 3 substituents, in particular with one substituent group.
- substituent group or groups are selected from: halo, cyano, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, azido, -NR " SO 2 R “ , -SO 2 NR R “ , -C(O)R “ , -C(O)OR “ , -OC(O)R “ , - NR '" C(O)R “ , -C(O)NR R “ , -NR “ R “ , -(CR “' R “' ) m OR " , wherein, each R " is independently selected from H, Ci-C 8 alkyl, -(CH 2 ) t (C 6 -Ci 0 aryl), -(CH 2 ) t (5-10 membered heteroaryl), -(CH 2 ) t (C 3 -Ci 0 cycloalkyl), and - (CH 2 ) t (4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl), wherein
- any aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl groups present may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted C 1 -C 4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Ci-C 4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted Ci-C 4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C 4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy.
- Each R independently represents H or Ci-C 6 alkyl.
- Substituted sulfanyl refers to the group -SR 61 , wherein R 61 is selected from:
- Ci-C 8 alkyl C 3 -Ci 0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C 6 -Ci 0 aryl, aralkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, and heteroaralkyl; or
- Exemplary 'substituted sulfanyl' groups are -S-(Ci-C 8 alkyl) and -S-(C 3 -Ci 0 cycloalkyl),
- t is an integer from 0 to 4 and any aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted Ci-C 4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted Ci-C 4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Ci-C 4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted Ci-C 4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C 4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy.
- 'substituted sulfanyl' includes the groups 'alkylsulfanyl' or 'alkylthio', 'substituted alkylthio' or 'substituted alkylsulfanyl', 'cycloalkylsulfanyl' or 'cycloalkylthio', 'substituted cycloalkylsulfanyl' or 'substituted cycloalkylthio', 'arylsulfanyl' or
- 'Alkylthio' or 'Alkylsulfanyl' refers to a radical -SR 62 where R 62 is a Ci-C 8 alkyl or group as defined herein. Representative examples include, but are not limited to, methylthio, ethylthio, propylthio and butylthio.
- 'Substituted Alkylthio'or 'substituted alkylsulfanyl' refers to the group -SR 63 where R 63 is a Ci-Cg alkyl, substituted with halo, substituted or unsubstituted amino, or hydroxy.
- 'Cycloalkylthio' or 'Cycloalkylsulfanyl' refers to a radical -SR 64 where R 64 is a C 3 -Ci 0 cycloalkyl or group as defined herein. Representative examples include, but are not limited to, cyclopropylthio, cyclohexylthio, and cyclopentylthio.
- 'Substituted cycloalkylthio' or 'substituted cycloalkylsulfanyl' refers to the group -SR 65 where R 65 is a C 3 -Ci 0 cycloalkyl, substituted with halo, substituted or unsubstituted amino, or hydroxy.
- 'Arylthio' or 'Arylsulfanyl' refers to a radical -SR 66 where R 66 is a C 6 -Ci 0 aryl group as defined herein.
- 'Heteroarylthio' or 'Heteroarylsulfanyl' refers to a radical -SR 67 where R 67 is a 5-10 membered heteroaryl group as defined herein.
- Substituted sulfmyl' refers to the group -S(O)R 68 , wherein R 68 is selected from:
- Ci-C 8 alkyl C 3 -Ci 0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C 6 -Ci 0 aryl, aralkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, and heteroaralkyl; or
- Exemplary 'substituted sulfmyl' groups are -S(O)-(Ci-C 8 alkyl) and -S(O)-(C 3 -Ci 0 cycloalkyl), -S(O)-(CH 2 WC 6 -Ci 0 aryl), -S(O)-(CH 2 ) t (5-10 membered heteroaryl), -S(O)-(CH 2 ) t (C 3 -Ci 0 cycloalkyl), and -S(O)-(CH 2 ) t (4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl), wherein t is an integer from 0 to 4 and any aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted Ci-C 4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted Ci-C 4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Ci-C 4 halo
- substituted sulfmyl includes the groups 'alkylsulfinyl', 'substituted alkylsulfinyl', 'cycloalkylsulfinyl', 'substituted cycloalkylsulfinyl', 'arylsulfinyl' and 'heteroarylsulfinyl' as defined herein.
- Alkylsulfinyl refers to a radical -S(O)R 69 where R 69 is a Ci-C 8 alkyl group as defined herein.
- Representative examples include, but are not limited to, methylsulfinyl, ethylsulfinyl, propylsulfinyl and butylsulfinyl.
- 'Substituted Alkylsulfinyl' refers to a radical -S(O)R 70 where R 70 is a Q-C 8 alkyl group as defined herein, substituted with halo, substituted or unsubstituted amino, or hydroxy.
- 'Cycloalkylsulfinyl' refers to a radical -S(O)R 71 where R 71 is a C 3 -Ci 0 cycloalkyl or group as defined herein. Representative examples include, but are not limited to, cyclopropylsulfinyl, cyclohexylsulfinyl, and cyclopentylsulfinyl.
- cycloalkylsulfinyl refers to the group -S(O)R 72 where R 72 is a C 3 -Ci 0 cycloalkyl, substituted with halo, substituted or unsubstituted amino, or hydroxy.
- Arylsulfmyl' refers to a radical -S(O)R 73 where R 73 is a C 6 -Ci 0 aryl group as defined herein.
- Heteroarylsulfinyl' refers to a radical -S(O)R 74 where R 74 is a 5-10 membered heteroaryl group as defined herein.
- Substituted sulfonyl' refers to the group -S(O) 2 R 75 , wherein R 75 is selected from:
- Ci-C 8 alkyl C 3 -Ci 0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C 6 -Ci 0 aryl, aralkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, and heteroaralkyl; or
- Exemplary 'substituted sulfonyl' groups are -S(O) 2 -(C r C 8 alkyl) and -S(O) 2 -(C 3 -Ci 0 cycloalkyl), -S(O) 2 -(CH 2 ) t (C 6 -Ci 0 aryl), -S(O) 2 -(CH 2 ) t (5-10 membered heteroaryl), -S(O) 2 -(CH 2 ) t (C 3 -Ci 0 cycloalkyl), and -S(O) 2 -(CH 2 ) t (4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl), wherein t is an integer from 0 to 4 and any aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted Ci-C 4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted Ci-C 4 alkyl
- substituted sulfonyl includes the groups alkylsulfonyl, substituted alkylsulfonyl, cycloalkylsulfonyl, substituted cycloalkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl and heteroarylsulfonyl.
- Alkylsulfonyl refers to a radical -S(O) 2 R 76 where R 76 is an Ci-C 8 alkyl group as defined herein.
- Representative examples include, but are not limited to, methylsulfonyl, ethylsulfonyl, propylsulfonyl and butylsulfonyl.
- Substituted Alkylsulfonyl refers to a radical -S(O) 2 R 77 where R 77 is an Ci-C 8 alkyl group as defined herein, substituted with halo, substituted or unsubstituted amino, or hydroxy.
- 'Cycloalkylsulfonyl' refers to a radical -S(O) 2 R 78 where R 78 is a C 3 -Ci 0 cycloalkyl or group as defined herein. Representative examples include, but are not limited to, cyclopropylsulfonyl, cyclohexylsulfonyl, and cyclopentylsulfonyl.
- cycloalkylsulfonyl refers to the group -S(O) 2 R 79 where R 79 is a C 3 -Ci 0 cycloalkyl, substituted with halo, substituted or unsubstituted amino, or hydroxy.
- 'Arylsulfonyl' refers to a radical -S(O) 2 R 80 where R 80 is an C 6 -Ci 0 aryl group as defined herein.
- 'Heteroarylsulfonyl' refers to a radical -S(O) 2 R 81 where R 81 is an 5-10 membered heteroaryl group as defined herein.
- 'Sulfo' or 'sulfonic acid' refers to a radical such as -SO 3 H.
- 'Substituted sulfo' or 'sulfonic acid ester' refers to the group -S(O) 2 OR 82 , wherein R 82 is selected from:
- Ci-C 8 alkyl C 3 -Ci 0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C 6 -Ci 0 aryl, aralkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, and heteroaralkyl; or
- Exemplary 'Substituted sulfo' or 'sulfonic acid ester' groups are -S(O) 2 -O-(Ci-C 8 alkyl) and -S(O) 2 -O-(C 3 -Ci 0 cycloalkyl), -S(O) 2 -O-(CH 2 WC 6 -Ci 0 aryl), -S(O) 2 -O-(CH 2 ) t (5-10 membered heteroaryl), -S(O) 2 -O-(CH 2 X(C 3 -Ci 0 cycloalkyl), and -S(O) 2 -O-(CH 2 ) t (4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl), wherein t is an integer from 0 to 4 and any aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted Ci-C 4 alkyl
- 'Thiol' refers to the group -SH.
- heterocyclic ring may have one to four heteroatoms so long as the heteroaromatic ring is chemically feasible and stable.
- 'Pharmaceutically acceptable means approved or approvable by a regulatory agency of the Federal or a state government or the corresponding agency in countries other than the United States, or that is listed in the U.S. Pharmacopoeia or other generally recognized pharmacopoeia for use in animals, and more particularly, in humans.
- 'Pharmaceutically acceptable salt' refers to a salt of a compound of the invention that is pharmaceutically acceptable and that possesses the desired pharmacological activity of the parent compound.
- such salts are non-toxic may be inorganic or organic acid addition salts and base addition salts.
- such salts include: (1) acid addition salts, formed with inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like; or formed with organic acids such as acetic acid, propionic acid, hexanoic acid, cyclopentanepropionic acid, glycolic acid, pyruvic acid, lactic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, malic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, 3-(4-hydroxybenzoyl) benzoic acid, cinnamic acid, mandelic acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, 1,2-ethane-disulfonic acid, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, 4-chlorobenzenesulfonic acid, 2-naphthalenesulfonic acid, 4-toluenesulfonic acid
- Salts further include, by way of example only, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, ammonium, tetraalkylammonium, and the like; and when the compound contains a basic functionality, salts of non toxic organic or inorganic acids, such as hydrochloride, hydrobromide, tartrate, mesylate, acetate, maleate, oxalate and the like.
- pharmaceutically acceptable cation refers to an acceptable cationic counter-ion of an acidic functional group. Such cations are exemplified by sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, ammonium, tetraalkylammonium cations, and the like.
- 'Pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle refers to a diluent, adjuvant, excipient or carrier with which a compound of the invention is administered.
- 'Prodrugs' refers to compounds, including derivatives of the compounds of the invention, which have cleavable groups and become by solvolysis or under physiological conditions the compounds of the invention which are pharmaceutically active in vivo. Such examples include, but are not limited to, choline ester derivatives and the like, N-alkylmorpholine esters and the like.
- 'Solvate' refers to forms of the compound that are associated with a solvent, usually by a solvolysis reaction. This physical association includes hydrogen bonding. Conventional solvents include water, ethanol, acetic acid and the like.
- the compounds of the invention may be prepared e.g. in crystalline form and may be solvated or hydrated.
- Suitable solvates include pharmaceutically acceptable solvates, such as hydrates, and further include both stoichiometric solvates and non-stoichiometric solvates. In certain instances the solvate will be capable of isolation, for example when one or more solvent molecules are incorporated in the crystal lattice of the crystalline solid. 'Solvate' encompasses both solution-phase and isolable solvates. Representative solvates include hydrates, ethanolates and methanolates.
- 'Subject' includes humans.
- the terms 'human', 'patient' and 'subject' are used interchangeably herein.
- 'Therapeutically effective amount means the amount of a compound that, when administered to a subject for treating a disease, is sufficient to effect such treatment for the disease.
- the "therapeutically effective amount” can vary depending on the compound, the disease and its severity, and the age, weight, etc., of the subject to be treated.
- 'Preventing' or 'prevention' refers to a reduction in risk of acquiring or developing a disease or disorder (i.e., causing at least one of the clinical symptoms of the disease not to develop in a subject that may be exposed to a disease-causing agent, or predisposed to the disease in advance of disease onset.
- the term 'prophylaxis' is related to 'prevention', and refers to a measure or procedure the purpose of which is to prevent, rather than to treat or cure a disease.
- Non-limiting examples of prophylactic measures may include the administration of vaccines; the administration of low molecular weight heparin to hospital patients at risk for thrombosis due, for example, to immobilization; and the administration of an anti-malarial agent such as chloroquine, in advance of a visit to a geographical region where malaria is endemic or the risk of contracting malaria is high.
- an anti-malarial agent such as chloroquine
- 'Treating' or 'treatment' of any disease or disorder refers, in one embodiment, to ameliorating the disease or disorder (i.e., arresting the disease or reducing the manifestation, extent or severity of at least one of the clinical symptoms thereof).
- 'treating' or 'treatment' refers to ameliorating at least one physical parameter, which may not be discernible by the subject.
- 'treating' or 'treatment' refers to modulating the disease or disorder, either physically, (e.g., stabilization of a discernible symptom), physiologically, (e.g., stabilization of a physical parameter), or both.
- "treating" or "treatment” relates to slowing the progression of the disease.
- the term 'cancer' refers to a malignant or benign growth of cells in skin or in body organs, for example but without limitation, breast, prostate, lung, kidney, pancreas, stomach or bowel.
- a cancer tends to infiltrate into adjacent tissue and spread (metastasise) to distant organs, for example to bone, liver, lung or the brain.
- cancer includes both metastatic rumour cell types, such as but not limited to, melanoma, lymphoma, leukaemia, fibrosarcoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, and mastocytoma and types of tissue carcinoma, such as but not limited to, colorectal cancer, prostate cancer, small cell lung cancer and non-small cell lung cancer, breast cancer, pancreatic cancer, bladder cancer, renal cancer, gastric cancer, glioblastoma, primary liver cancer, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer and uterine leiomyosarcoma.
- metastatic rumour cell types such as but not limited to, melanoma, lymphoma, leukaemia, fibrosarcoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, and mastocytoma
- types of tissue carcinoma such as but not limited to, colorectal cancer, prostate cancer, small cell lung cancer and non-small cell lung cancer, breast cancer, pancreatic cancer, bladder cancer, renal cancer, gastric cancer, glioblast
- leukaemia refers to neoplastic diseases of the blood and blood forming organs. Such diseases can cause bone marrow and immune system dysfunction, which renders the host highly susceptible to infection and bleeding.
- ranges are referred to herein, for example but without limitation, Ci-Cg alkyl
- the citation of a range should be considered a representation of each member of said range.
- Other derivatives of the compounds of this invention have activity in both their acid and acid derivative forms, but in the acid sensitive form often offers advantages of solubility, tissue compatibility, or delayed release in the mammalian organism (see, Bundgard, H., Design of Prodrugs, pp. 7-9, 21-24, Elsevier, Amsterdam 1985).
- Prodrugs include acid derivatives well know to practitioners of the art, such as, for example, esters prepared by reaction of the parent acid with a suitable alcohol, or amides prepared by reaction of the parent acid compound with a substituted or unsubstituted amine, or acid anhydrides, or mixed anhydrides. Simple aliphatic or aromatic esters, amides and anhydrides derived from acidic groups pendant on the compounds of this invention are particularly useful prodrugs. In some cases it is desirable to prepare double ester type prodrugs such as (acyloxy)alkyl esters or ((alkoxycarbonyl)oxy)alkylesters. Particular such prodrugs are the Ci to C 8 alkyl, C 2 -C 8 alkenyl, aryl, C 7 - Ci 2 substituted aryl, and C7-C 12 arylalkyl esters of the compounds of the invention.
- the term 'isotopic variant' refers to a compound that contains unnatural proportions of isotopes at one or more of the atoms that constitute such compound.
- an 'isotopic variant' of a compound can contain one or more non-radioactive isotopes, such as for example, deuterium ( 2 H or D), carbon- 13 ( 13 C), nitrogen- 15 ( 15 N), or the like.
- the following atoms, where present, may vary, so that for example, any hydrogen may be 2 HIO, any carbon may be 13 C, or any nitrogen may be 15 N, and that the presence and placement of such atoms may be determined within the skill of the art.
- the invention may include the preparation of isotopic variants with radioisotopes, in the instance for example, where the resulting compounds may be used for drug and/or substrate tissue distribution studies.
- the radioactive isotopes tritium, i.e. 3 H, and carbon- 14, i.e. 14 C, are particularly useful for this purpose in view of their ease of incorporation and ready means of detection.
- compounds may be prepared that are substituted with positron emitting isotopes, such as 11 C, 18 F, 15 O and 13 N, and would be useful in Positron Emission Topography (PET) studies for examining substrate receptor occupancy.
- PET Positron Emission Topography
- Stereoisomers that are not mirror images of one another are termed 'diastereomers' and those that are non-superimposable mirror images of each other are termed 'enantiomers'.
- a compound has an asymmetric center, for example, it is bonded to four different groups, a pair of enantiomers is possible.
- An enantiomer can be characterized by the absolute configuration of its asymmetric center and is described by the R- and S-sequencing rules of Cahn and Prelog, or by the manner in which the molecule rotates the plane of polarized light and designated as dextrorotatory or levorotatory (i.e., as (+) or (-)-isomers respectively).
- a chiral compound can exist as either individual enantiomer or as a mixture thereof. A mixture containing equal proportions of the enantiomers is called a 'racemic mixture'.
- Tautomers' refer to compounds that are interchangeable forms of a particular compound structure, and that vary in the displacement of hydrogen atoms and electrons. Thus, two structures may be in equilibrium through the movement of ⁇ electrons and an atom (usually H). For example, enols and ketones are tautomers because they are rapidly interconverted by treatment with either acid or base. Another example of tautomerism is the aci- and nitro- forms of phenylnitromethane, that are likewise formed by treatment with acid or base. [00133] Tautomeric forms may be relevant to the attainment of the optimal chemical reactivity and biological activity of a compound of interest.
- the compounds of this invention may possess one or more asymmetric centers; such compounds can therefore be produced as individual (R)- or (S)- stereoisomers or as mixtures thereof.
- R R
- S S
- the compounds of the present invention may be described generally as pyrazolo[4,3- d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-ones substituted in the 5-position.
- the present invention relates to compounds having anti-inflammatory properties, according to formula (I):
- CyI is substituted or unsubstituted aryl or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl;
- R 1 is H, substituted or unsubstituted alky;
- R is H, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkylalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl;
- R 4 is alkyl substituted with halo, alkoxy, aryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl; and ml is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4; provided that when CyI is heterocycloalkyl and the heterocycloalkyl group is joined to -(CH 2 )ml- via a N atom of heterocycloalkyl group then ml is 2, 3 or 4; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate or prodrug thereof or isotopic variants thereof, stereoisomers or tautomers thereof.
- the compound is according to formulae Ia or Ib:
- R 1 , R 2 , R 4 and ml are as described for formula I; Ar is substituted or unsubstituted aryl; and HetAr is substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl.
- R 1 is alkyl. In another embodiment R 1 is Me, Et or i-Pr. In another embodiment R 1 is Me.
- ml is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4. In another embodiment ml is 1, 2 or 3. In yet another embodiment ml is 1.
- the compound is according to formula Ia.
- the compound is according to formulae Ha, lib, or Hc:
- Ar is substituted or unsubstituted phenyl
- R 2 and R 4 are as described for formula I.
- Ar is phenyl unsubstituted or substituted with one or more groups selected from alkyl, halo, haloalkyl, and alkoxy.
- Ar is phenyl substituted with cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl.
- Ar is phenyl substituted with piperidinyl, piperazinyl, and morpholinyl.
- Ar is phenyl substituted with pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, isoxazolyl, and oxazolyl.
- Ar is phenyl substituted with pyridyl, and pyrimidinyl.
- the compound is according to formulae Ilia or IHb:
- R 2 and R 4 are as described for formula I; and each of R 3b and R 3c is independently H, alkyl, halo, haloalkyl, or alkoxy.
- one of R 3b and R 3c is Me, F, Cl, CF 3 , OMe, or OEt and the other is H.
- both R 3b and R 3c are independently F, Cl, OMe, CF 3 , or OEt.
- both R 3b and R 3c are independently F, Cl, OMe, CF 3 , or OEt.
- both R 3b and R 3c are Cl.
- both R 3b and R 3c are F.
- both R 3b and R 3c are OMe.
- both R 3b and R 3c are CF 3 .
- both R c is H.
- the compound is according to formulae IVa or IVb:
- R 2 and R 4 are as described for formula I;
- R 3b is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, heterocycloalkyl or heteroaryl.
- R , 3 3 b D is selected from substituted or unsubstituted piperidinyl, piperazinyl, and morpholinyl.
- R 3b is selected from substituted or unsubstituted pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, and oxazolyl.
- R 3b is selected from substituted or unsubstituted pyridyl, and pyrimidinyl.
- the compound is according to formulae Va, Vb, Vc, Vd, Ve, Vf, Vg, and Vh:
- R 4 is alkyl substituted with halo, alkoxy, aryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl.
- R 4 is alkyl substituted with halo or alkoxy.
- R 4 is alkyl substituted with Cl, F, OMe, or O-i-Pr.
- R 4 is 4,4,4- trifluoro-n-butyl.
- R 4 is 3-methoxy-n- propyl, or 3-isopropoxy-n-propyl.
- R 4 is alkyl substituted with cycloalkyl.
- R 4 is alkyl substituted with cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl or cyclohexyl.
- R 4 is cyclopropylmethyl, cyclopentylmethyl or cyclohexylmethyl.
- R 4 is alkyl substituted with heterocycloalkyl.
- R 4 is alkyl substituted with piperidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydropyranyl, or morpholinyl.
- R 4 is 2-(morpholin- l-yl)ethyl, 3-(morpholin-l-yl)propyl, 2-(tetrahydropyran-4-yl)ethyl, or (tetrahydrofuran-2-yl)methyl.
- the compound is according to formulae Via, VIb, VIc, VId, VIe, VIf, VIg, and VIh:
- R 2 is as described for formula I.
- the compound is according to formula Ib.
- the compound is according to formulae Vila, VIIb or VIIc:
- HetAr is substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl
- R 2 and R 4 are as described for formula I.
- HetAr is pyridyl unsubstituted or substituted with one or more groups selected from alkyl, halo, haloalkyl, and alkoxy.
- HetAr is pyridyl substituted with cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl.
- the compound is according to formula Villa or VIIIb:
- R 2 and R 4 are as described for formula I; and each of R 3b and R 3c is independently H, alkyl, halo, haloalkyl, or alkoxy.
- R 3b and R , 3 3 C c is Me, F, Cl, CF 3 , OMe, or OEt and the other is H.
- R 3b and R 3c are independently F, Cl, OMe, CF 3 , or OEt.
- the compound is according to formulae IX or IXb:
- R 2 and R 4 are as described for formula I;
- R 3b is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, heterocycloalkyl or heteroaryl.
- R , 3 3b D is selected from substituted or unsubstituted piperidinyl, piperazinyl, and morpholinyl.
- R 3b is selected from substituted or unsubstituted pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, and oxazolyl.
- R 3b is selected from substituted or unsubstituted pyridyl, and pyrimidinyl.
- the compound is according to formula Xa, Xb, Xc, Xd, Xe, Xf, Xg, and Xh:
- the compound is accordingla XIa, XIb, XIc, XId, XIe, XIf, XIg, and XIh:
- HetAr is selected from substituted or unsubstituted pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, isoxazolyl, and oxazolyl.
- HetAr is selected from pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, isoxazolyl, and oxazolyl; substituted with one or more groups selected from Ci-Ce alkyl, halo, haloalkyl, and phenyl.
- the pyrazolyl imidazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, isoxazolyl, and oxazolyl; substituted with one or more groups selected from Ci-Ce alkyl, halo, haloalkyl, and phenyl.
- HetAr is mono substituted and the substitution is selected from Ph, Me, CF 3 , and halo. In another embodiment, the HetAr is di substituted and the substitution is selected from Ph, Me and CF 3
- the compound is according to formulae XIIa, XIIb, XIIc, XIId, and XIIe:
- R is Me.
- R 4 is alkyl substituted with halo, alkoxy, aryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl.
- R 4 is alkyl substituted with halo or alkoxy.
- R 4 is alkyl substituted with Cl, F, OMe, or O-i-Pr.
- R 4 is 4,4,4- trifluoro-n-butyl.
- R 4 is 3-methoxy- n-propyl, or 3-isopropoxy-n-propyl.
- R 4 is alkyl substituted with cycloalkyl.
- R 4 is alkyl substituted with cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl or cyclohexyl.
- R 4 is cyclopropylmethyl, cyclopentylmethyl or cyclohexylmethyl. [0141] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae VIIa-XIIe, R 4 is alkyl substituted with heterocycloalkyl.
- R 4 is alkyl substituted with piperidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydropyranyl, or morpholinyl.
- R 4 is 2-
- the compound is according to formulae XIIIa, XIIIb, XIIIc, XIIId, and XIIIe:
- R 2 is Me, Et, n-Pr, t-Bu, cyclopropyl, cyclohexyl, or cyclopentyl.
- R 2 is phenyl or substituted phenyl.
- R 2 is pyridyl
- R is alkyl or cycloalkyl. In another embodiment R 2 is alkyl.
- the compound is selected from Table 1 ; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate or prodrug thereof or isotopic variants thereof, stereoisomers or tautomers thereof.
- the compound is selected from:
- the compound is selected from all compounds of the invention exemplified specifically herein.
- a compound for use according to the invention may contain one or more asymmetric carbon atoms and may exist in racemic and optically active forms. It will be understood by a person of skill in the art that the present invention includes both the racemic mixture and each enantiomer in isolated form.
- a compound according to an embodiment of the invention may be in trans or cis form.
- the present invention also extends to a prodrug of a compound according to an embodiment of the invention such as an ester or amide thereof.
- a prodrug is a compound that may be converted under physiological conditions or by solvolysis to a compound according to an embodiment of the invention or to a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of a compound according to an embodiment of the invention.
- a prodrug may be inactive when administered to a subject but is converted in vivo to an active compound of the invention.
- 'Pharmaceutically acceptable prodrugs' as used herein refers to those prodrugs of the compounds useful in the present invention, which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of patients with undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio, and effective for their intended use of the compounds of the invention.
- 'prodrug' means a compound that is transformed in vivo to yield an effective compound useful in the present invention or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate or solvate thereof.
- the transformation may occur by various mechanisms, such as through hydrolysis in blood.
- the compounds bearing metabolically cleavable groups have the advantage that they may exhibit improved bioavailability as a result of enhanced solubility and/or rate of absorption conferred upon the parent compound by virtue of the presence of the metabolically cleavable group, thus, such compounds act as prodrugs.
- a thorough discussion is provided in Design of Prodrugs, H. Bundgard, ed., Elsevier (1985); Methods in Enzymology; K.
- compositions suitable for administration typically comprise at least one compound of the invention and at least one pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
- pharmaceutically acceptable carrier is intended to include solid carriers such as lactose, magnesium stearate, terra alba, sucrose, talc, stearic acid, gelatin, agar, pectin, acacia or the like; and liquids such as vegetable oils, arachis oil and sterile water, or the like, any and all solvents, dispersion media, coatings, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic and absorption delaying agents, and the like, compatible with pharmaceutical administration.
- compositions are not to be construed as limiting.
- the use of such media and agents for pharmaceutically active substances is well known in the art. Except insofar as any conventional media or agent is incompatible with the active compound, use thereof in the compositions is contemplated. Supplementary active compounds can also be incorporated into the compositions.
- a pharmaceutical composition of the invention is formulated to be compatible with its intended route of administration.
- routes of administration include parenteral, e.g., intravenous, intradermal, subcutaneous, oral (e.g., inhalation), transdermal (topical), transmucosal, and rectal administration.
- Solutions or suspensions used for parenteral, intradermal, or subcutaneous application can include the following components: a sterile diluent such as water for injection, saline solution, fixed oils, polyethylene glycols, glycerine, propylene glycol or other synthetic solvents; antibacterial agents such as benzyl alcohol or methyl parabens; antioxidants such as ascorbic acid or sodium bisulfite; chelating agents such as ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid; buffers such as acetates, citrates or phosphates and agents for the adjustment of tonicity such as sodium chloride or dextrose.
- the pH can be adjusted with acids or bases, such as hydrochloric acid or sodium hydroxide.
- the parenteral preparation can be enclosed in ampoules, disposable syringes or multiple dose vials made of glass or plastic.
- compositions suitable for injectable use include sterile aqueous solutions
- suitable carriers include physiological saline, bacteriostatic water, Cremophor ELTM (BASF, Parsippany, NJ) or phosphate buffered saline (PBS).
- the composition must be sterile and should be fluid to the extent that easy syringability exists. It must be stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage and must be preserved against the contaminating action of microorganisms such as bacteria and fungi.
- the carrier can be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (for example, glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyetheylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof.
- the proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of a coating such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersion and by the use of surfactants.
- Prevention of the action of microorganisms can be achieved by various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, parabens, 'chlorobutanol, phenol, ascorbic acid, thimerosal, and the like.
- Sterile injectable solutions can be prepared by incorporating the active compound (e.g., a compound according to an embodiment of the invention) in the required amount in an appropriate solvent with one or a combination of ingredients enumerated above, as required, followed by filtered sterilization.
- active compound e.g., a compound according to an embodiment of the invention
- dispersions are prepared by incorporating the active compound into a sterile vehicle which contains a basic dispersion medium and the required other ingredients from those enumerated above.
- a sterile vehicle which contains a basic dispersion medium and the required other ingredients from those enumerated above.
- the particular methods of preparation are vacuum drying and freeze-drying which yields a powder of the active ingredient plus any additional desired ingredient from a previously sterile-filtered solution thereof.
- Oral compositions generally include an inert diluent or an edible carrier. They can be enclosed in gelatin capsules or compressed into tablets. For the purpose of oral therapeutic administration, the active compound can be incorporated with excipients and used in the form of tablets, troches, or capsules. Oral compositions can also be prepared using a fluid carrier for use as a mouthwash, wherein the compound in the fluid carrier is applied orally and swished and expectorated or swallowed. [0159] Pharmaceutically compatible binding agents, and/or adjuvant materials can be included as part of the composition.
- the tablets, pills, capsules, troches and the like can contain any of the following ingredients, or compounds of a similar nature: a binder such as microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth or gelatin; an excipient such as starch or lactose, a disintegrating agent such as alginic acid, Primogel, or corn starch; a lubricant such as magnesium stearate or Sterotes; a glidant such as colloidal silicon dioxide; a sweetening agent such as sucrose or saccharin; or a flavoring agent such as peppermint, methyl salicylate, or orange flavoring.
- a binder such as microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth or gelatin
- an excipient such as starch or lactose, a disintegrating agent such as alginic acid, Primogel, or corn starch
- a lubricant such as magnesium stearate or Sterotes
- a glidant such as colloidal silicon dioxide
- the compounds are delivered in the form of an aerosol spray from pressured container or dispenser which contains a suitable propellant, e.g., a gas such as carbon dioxide, or a nebulizer.
- a suitable propellant e.g., a gas such as carbon dioxide, or a nebulizer.
- Systemic administration can also be by transmucosal or transdermal means.
- penetrants appropriate to the barrier to be permeated are used in the formulation.
- penetrants are generally known in the art, and include, for example, for transmucosal administration, detergents, bile salts, and fusidic acid derivatives.
- Transmucosal administration can be accomplished through the use of nasal sprays or suppositories.
- the active compounds are formulated into ointments, salves, gels, or creams as generally known in the art.
- the compounds can also be prepared in the form of suppositories (e.g., with conventional suppository bases such as cocoa butter and other glycerides) or retention enemas for rectal delivery.
- the active compounds are prepared with carriers that will protect the compound against rapid elimination from the body, such as a controlled release formulation, including implants and microencapsulated delivery systems.
- Biodegradable, biocompatible polymers can be used, such as ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, collagen, polyorthoesters, and polylactic acid. Methods for preparation of such formulations will be apparent to those skilled in the art.
- the materials can also be obtained commercially from Alza Corporation and Nova Pharmaceuticals, Inc.
- Liposomal suspensions (including liposomes targeted to infected cells with monoclonal antibodies to viral antigens) can also be used as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. These can be prepared according to methods known to those skilled in the art.
- Dosage unit form refers to physically discrete units suited as unitary dosages for the subject to be treated; each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active compound calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier.
- the specification for the dosage unit forms of the invention are dictated by and directly dependent on the unique characteristics of the active compound and the particular therapeutic effect to be achieved, and the limitations inherent in the art of compounding such an active compound for the treatment of individuals.
- compositions can be included in a container, pack, or dispenser together with instructions for administration.
- a compound according to an embodiment of the invention may be provided as a salt, particularly as a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of compounds of formula I, formulae Ia-Ib, or any of the formulae herein described.
- pharmaceutically acceptable salts of these compounds include those derived from organic acids such as acetic acid, malic acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, lactic acid, oxalic acid, succinic acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, benzoic acid, salicylic acid, phenylacetic acid, mandelic acid, methanesulphonic acid, benzenesulphonic acid and/>-toluenesulphonic acid, mineral acids such as hydrochloric and sulphuric acid and the like, giving methanesulphonate, benzenesulphonate, p- toluenesulphonate, hydrochloride and sulphate, and the like, respectively or those derived from bases such as organic and inorganic bases.
- suitable inorganic bases for the formation of salts of compounds for this invention include the hydroxides, carbonates, and bicarbonates of ammonia, lithium, sodium, calcium, potassium, aluminium, iron, magnesium, zinc and the like. Salts can also be formed with suitable organic bases.
- bases suitable for the formation of pharmaceutically acceptable base addition salts with compounds of the present invention include organic bases which are nontoxic and strong enough to form salts.
- Such organic bases are already well known in the art and may include amino acids such as arginine and lysine, mono-, di-, or trihydroxyalkylamines such as mono-, di-, and triethanolamine, choline, mono-, di-, and trialkylamines, such as methylamine, dimethylamine, and trimethylamine, guanidine; N-methylglucosamine; N-methylpiperazine; morpholine; ethylenediamine; N- benzylphenethylamine; tris(hydroxymethyl) aminomethane; and the like.
- amino acids such as arginine and lysine, mono-, di-, or trihydroxyalkylamines such as mono-, di-, and triethanolamine, choline, mono-, di-, and trialkylamines, such as methylamine, dimethylamine, and trimethylamine, guanidine; N-methylglucosamine; N-methylpiperazine; morpholine; ethylenediamine; N-
- Salts of compounds according to an embodiment of the invention may be prepared in a conventional manner using methods well known in the art.
- Acid addition salts of said basic compounds may be prepared by dissolving the free base compounds according to the first or second aspects of the invention in aqueous or aqueous alcohol solution or other suitable solvents containing the required acid.
- a base salt of said compound may be prepared by reacting said compound with a suitable base. The acid or base salt may separate directly or can be obtained by concentrating the solution e.g. by evaporation.
- the compounds of this invention may also exist in solvated or hydrated forms.
- a compound of the invention is admixed as a dry powder with a dry gelatin binder in an approximate 1:2 weight ratio.
- a minor amount of magnesium stearate is added as a lubricant.
- the mixture is formed into 240-270 mg tablets (80-90 mg of active amide compound per tablet) in a tablet press.
- a compound of the invention is admixed as a dry powder with a starch diluent in an approximate 1 : 1 weight ratio. The mixture is filled into 250 mg capsules (125 mg of active amide compound per capsule).
- a compound of the invention (125 mg), sucrose (1.75 g) and xanthan gum (4 mg) are blended, passed through a No. 10 mesh U.S. sieve, and then mixed with a previously made solution of microcrystalline cellulose and sodium carboxymethyl cellulose (11 :89, 50 mg) in water.
- Sodium benzoate (10 mg) flavor, and color are diluted with water and added with stirring. Sufficient water is then added to produce a total volume of 5 mL.
- a compound of the invention is admixed as a dry powder with a dry gelatin binder in an approximate 1:2 weight ratio.
- a minor amount of magnesium stearate is added as a lubricant.
- the mixture is formed into 450-900 mg tablets (150-300 mg of active amide compound) in a tablet press.
- a compound of the invention is dissolved or suspended in a buffered sterile saline injectable aqueous medium to a concentration of approximately 5 mg/mL.
- Stearyl alcohol (250 g) and a white petrolatum (250 g) are melted at about 75°C and then a mixture of a compound of the invention (50 g) methylparaben (0.25 g), propylparaben (0.15 g), sodium lauryl sulfate (10 g), and propylene glycol (120 g) dissolved in water (about 370 g) is added and the resulting mixture is stirred until it congeals.
- the present invention relates also to a method of treatment or prevention of osteoarthritis, which comprises administering to a subject in need thereof, a therapeutically effective amount of compound of the invention.
- the present invention relates also to a method of treatment or prevention of osteoarthritis, which comprises administering to a subject in need thereof, a therapeutically effective amount of an inhibitor of PDElA according to any of the formulae herein described.
- the present invention relates also to a method of treatment or prevention of osteoarthritis, which comprises administering to a subject in need thereof, a therapeutically effective amount of an inhibitor of PDElA according to formulae Ia-Ib.
- Another aspect of the present method invention relates to a method of treatment or prophylaxis of a condition characterized by abnormal PDElA activity, which comprises administering a therapeutically effective amount of a PDElA inhibiting compound according to formula I, formulae Ia-Ib, or any of the formulae herein described.
- a further aspect of the present method invention is a method of treatment or prophylaxis of a disease involving degradation of cartilage, which comprises administering a therapeutically effective a compound according to formula I, formulae Ia-Ib or any of the formulae herein decribed.
- a special embodiment of the present method invention is a method of treatment or prevention of OA, which comprises administering to a subject in need thereof, a therapeutically effective amount of a compound according to formula I, formulae Ia-Ib or any of the formulae herein described.
- This invention also relates to the use of the present compounds in the manufacture of a medicament for treatment or prophylaxis of a condition prevented, ameliorated or eliminated by administration of an inhibitor of PDElA which is a compound of the invention, or a condition selected from diseases involving inflammation, most particularly for the treatment of diseases selected from osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis and osteoporosis.
- an inhibitor of PDElA which is a compound of the invention, or a condition selected from diseases involving inflammation, most particularly for the treatment of diseases selected from osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis and osteoporosis.
- Administration of the compound of the present invention to the subject patient includes both self-administration and administration by another person.
- the patient may be in need of treatment for an existing disease or medical condition, or may desire prophylactic treatment to prevent or reduce the risk for diseases and medical conditions affected by a disturbance in bone metabolism.
- the compound of the present invention may be delivered to the subject patient orally, transdermally, via inhalation, injection, nasally, rectally or via a sustained release formulation.
- a particular regimen of the present method comprises the administration to a subject in suffering from a disease condition characterized by a disturbance in bone and/or cartilage metabolism, of an effective PDEIA-inhibiting amount of a compound of the present invention for a period of time sufficient to reduce the abnormal levels of bone and/or cartilage degradation in the patient, and in particular terminate, the self-perpetuating processes responsible for said degradation.
- a special embodiment of the method comprises administering of an effective PDElA inhibiting amount of a compound of the present invention to a subject patient suffering from or susceptible to the development of osteoarthritis, for a period of time sufficient to reduce or prevent, respectively, collagen and bone degradation in the joints of said patient, and in particular terminate, the self-perpetuating processes responsible for said degradation.
- Toxicity and therapeutic efficacy of such compounds can be determined by standard pharmaceutical procedures in cell cultures or experimental animals, e.g., for determining the LD 50 (the dose lethal to 50% of the population) and the ED 50 (the dose therapeutically effective in 50% of the population).
- the dose ratio between toxic and therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index and it can be expressed as the ratio LD 50 ZED 50 .
- Particular compounds are those that exhibit large therapeutic indices. While compounds that exhibit toxic side effects may be used, care should be taken to design a delivery system that targets such compounds to the site of affected tissue in order to minimize potential damage to uninfected cells and, thereby, reduce side effects.
- the data obtained from the cell culture assays and animal studies can be used in formulating a range of dosage for use in humans.
- the dosage of such compounds lies particularly within a range of circulating concentrations that include the ED 50 with little or no toxicity.
- the dosage may vary within this range depending upon the dosage form employed and the route of administration utilized.
- the therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially from cell culture assays.
- a dose may be formulated in animal models to achieve a circulating plasma concentration range that includes the IC 5 O (i.e., the concentration of the test compound which achieves a half-maximal inhibition of symptoms) as determined in cell culture.
- IC 5 O i.e., the concentration of the test compound which achieves a half-maximal inhibition of symptoms
- levels in plasma may be measured, for example, by high performance liquid chromatography.
- a particular therapeutically effective amount of the compound of the present invention to administer to a subject patient is about 0.1 mg/kg to about 10 mg/kg administered from once to three times a day.
- an effective regimen of the present method may administer about 5 mg to about 1000 mg of said compound of the present invention from once to three times a day.
- the specific dose level for any particular subject patient will depend upon a variety of factors including the age, body weight, general health, sex, diet, time of administration, route of administration, rate of excretion, drug combination and the severity of the particular inflammatory condition. A consideration of these factors is well within the purview of the ordinarily skilled clinician for the purpose of determining the therapeutically effective or prophylactically effective dosage amount needed to prevent, counter, or arrest the progress of the condition.
- each dose provides from about 0.01 to about 20 mg/kg of the compound of the invention, with particular doses each providing from about 0.1 to about 10 mg/kg and especially about 1 to about 5 mg/kg.
- Transdermal doses are generally selected to provide similar or lower blood levels than are achieved using injection doses.
- the compounds of this invention When used to prevent the onset of a condition related to bone and/or cartilage degradation the compounds of this invention will be administered to a patient at risk for developing the condition, typically on the advice and under the supervision of a physician, at the dosage levels described above. Patients at risk for developing a particular condition generally include those who have been identified by genetic testing or screening to be particularly susceptible to developing said condition.
- the compounds of this invention can be administered as the sole active agent or they can be administered in combination with other agents, including other compounds that demonstrate the same or a similar therapeutic activity and that are determined to safe and efficacious for such combined administration.
- the compounds of this invention can be prepared from readily available starting materials using the following general methods and procedures. It will be appreciated that where typical or particular process conditions (i.e., reaction temperatures, times, mole ratios of reactants, solvents, pressures, etc.) are given; however, other process conditions can also be used unless otherwise stated. Optimum reaction conditions may vary with the particular reactants or solvent used, but such conditions can be determined by one skilled in the art by routine optimization procedures.
- pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidinones compounds of this invention can be prepared from readily available starting materials using the following general methods and procedures. It will be appreciated that where typical or particular process conditions (i.e., reaction temperatures, times, mole ratios of reactants, solvents, pressures, etc.) are given, other process conditions can also be used unless otherwise stated. Optimum reaction conditions may vary with the particular reactants or solvent used, but such conditions can be determined by one skilled in the art by routine optimization procedures. [0196] Additionally, as will be apparent to those skilled in the art, conventional protecting groups may be necessary to prevent certain functional groups from undergoing undesired reactions.
- Aqueous of sodium hydroxide (2M, 100 mL) is added to 5-fert-butyl-2-methyl-2H- pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (185 mmol) and the reaction mixture is heated under reflux for 2.5h. On completion, the reaction mixture is allowed to cool to room temperature, diluted with water (100 mL) and treated with aqueous hydrochloric acid (30%) until a p ⁇ of 2 is obtained. The precipitated solid is collected by filtration, washed with water and dried at 60 0 C for 24h to afford 5-fert-butyl-2-methyl-2H- pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid as an off-white solid (27.1g, 80%).
- This intermediate may be obtained using the same reaction sequence as described for 5- chloro- 1 -methyl-3 -propyl- 1 ,6-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-one, starting with 4-amino-5-tert- butyl-2-methyl-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid amide instead of 4-amino-l-methyl-3-propyl-pyrazole-5- carboxamide.
- This intermediate may be obtained using the same reaction sequence as described for 5- chloro-l-methyl-3- tert butyl- l,6-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-one, starting with 2-ethyl-5-tert- butyl-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid ethyl ester instead of 2-methyl-5-tert-butyl-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid ethyl ester.
- This intermediate may be obtained using the same reaction sequence as described for 5- chloro- 1 -ethyl-3-tert-butyl- 1 ,6-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-one starting with 5-propyl-pyrazole-
- This intermediate may be obtained using the same reaction sequence as described for 5- chloro- 1 -methyl-3-tert-butyl- 1 ,6-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-one, starting with 2-z,r ⁇ -propyl-5- propyl-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid ethyl ester instead of 2-methyl-5-tert-butyl -pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid ethyl ester.
- the white precipitate obtained via this method may be collected by filtration and dried to give 3-bromo-l- methyl-3a,7a-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidine-5,7-diol as a brown solid.
- Preparative HPLC Waters XBridge Prep C18 5 ⁇ m ODB 19mm ID x 100mm L (Part No.186002978). All the methods use MeCN/H 2 O gradients. H 2 O contains either 0.1% Trifluoroacetic acid (TFA) or 0.1% Ammonia.
- TFA Trifluoroacetic acid
- Preparative HPLC Waters XBridge Prep C18 5 ⁇ m ODB 19mm ID x 100mm L (Part No.186002978). All the methods use MeCN/H 2 O gradients. H 2 O contains either 0.1% Trifluoroacetic acid (TFA) or 0.1% Ammonia.
- TFA Trifluoroacetic acid
- H 2 O contains either 0.1% Trifluoroacetic acid (TFA) or 0.1% Ammonia.
- TFA Trifluoroacetic acid
- Ammonia 0.1% Ammonia.
- Preparative HPLC Waters XBridge Prep C 18 5 ⁇ m ODB 19mm ID x 100mm L. The method uses MeCN/H 2 O 55-80% gradients. H 2 O contains 0.1% Trifluoroacetic acid (TFA).
- TFA Trifluoroacetic acid
- Preparative HPLC Waters XBridge Prep C 18 5 ⁇ m ODB 19mm ID x 100mm L. The method uses MeCN/H 2 O 65-90% gradients. H 2 O contains 0.1% Trifluoroacetic acid (TFA)
- Preparative HPLC Waters XBridge Prep Cl 8 5 ⁇ m ODB 19mm ID x 100mm L. The method uses MeCN/H 2 O 35-60% gradients. H 2 O contains 0.1% Trifluoroacetic acid (TFA).
- TFA Trifluoroacetic acid
- Preparative HPLC Waters XBridge Prep C 18 5 ⁇ m ODB 19mm ID x 100mm L. The method uses MeCN/H 2 O 35-60% gradients. H 2 O contains 0.1% Trifluoroacetic acid (TFA).
- TFA Trifluoroacetic acid
- Preparative HPLC Waters XBridge Prep Cl 8 5 ⁇ m ODB 19mm ID x 100mm L. The method uses MeCN/H 2 O 65-90% gradients. H 2 O contains 0.1% Trifluoroacetic acid (TFA)
- Preparative HPLC Waters XBridge Prep C 18 5 ⁇ m ODB 19mm ID x 100mm L. The method uses MeCN/H 2 O 65-90% gradients. H 2 O contains 0.1% Trifluoroacetic acid (TFA)
- Preparative HPLC Waters XBridge Prep C 18 5 ⁇ m ODB 19mm ID x 100mm L. The method uses MeCN/H 2 O 75-100% gradients. H 2 O contains 0.1% Trifluoroacetic acid (TFA)
- 62AM2PEB 62AM2PEB
- Its principle is based on HTRF® technology (Homogeneous Time-Resolved
- the method is a competitive immunoassay between native cAMP and the cAMP labeled with XL665.
- the tracer binding is visualized by a monoclonal antibody against cAMP, labeled with
- the specific signal i.e. energy transfer
- concentration of cAMP in the sample see Figure 1.
- reaction buffer Tris 2OmM pH 7.4, 4 ⁇ g/mLl calmodulin, 3mM MgCl 2 , 1.5mM CaC12, 0.2mg/mL BSA and
- PDElA hydro lyses cAMP into 5'AMP; this low cAMP concentration will result in a high signal. A PDElA inhibitor will result in a decrease of the signal.
- DMSO (0% inhibition) is used, as a variable control lO ⁇ M Zaprinast (+/- 50% inhibition) is used, and as negative control compound lO ⁇ M Ro-20-1724 (0% inhibition) is used.
- the positive and negative control are used to calculate z' and PIN values.
- Phosphodiesterase Assay Kit from Biomol, a colorimetric, non-radioactive assay.
- the basis for the assay is the cleavage of cAMP by PDElA.
- the 5'AMP is further cleaved into the nucleoside and phosphate by the enzyme 5 '-nucleotidase (catnr KI-307).
- the phosphate released due to enzymatic cleavage is quantified using BIOMOL GREENTM reagent (catnr AK-111) in a modified Malachite Green assayl,2.
- a PDElA inhibitor will result in a decrease of the signal.
- the reaction buffer is Tris 2OmM pH 7.4,
- a cellular PDElA assay was developed in order to determine PDElA inhibitor activity on cAMP levels in forskolin (NHK477) stimulated HEK293 cells transiently transfected with PDElA with HTRF® (Homogeneous Time- Resolved Fluorescence) cAMP dynamic 2 bulk kit (from Cisbio).
- HEK 293T are routinely maintained in Dulbecco's Modified Eagle's Medium (DMEM) containing 10% heat inactivated fetal calf serum, 100 U/mL Penicillin and 100 ⁇ g/ml Streptomycin.
- DMEM Dulbecco's Modified Eagle's Medium
- HEK 293T 70 % confluent HEK 293T are used for reverse transfection that involves simultaneously transfecting and plating cells. 60 000 cells are transiently transfected with lOOng of pcDNA3.1(+)PDElA
- Transfected cells are seeded in poly-D-lysine coated 96-well plates. After overnight incubation at 37°C, 10% CO 2 , transfection medium is removed and 100 ⁇ L of cell culture medium are added.
- Jet-PEI Polyplus
- Htrf reagents are added to 20 ⁇ L diluted cell lysate: lO ⁇ L cAMP-d2 (cAMP labelled with d2 dye), then lO ⁇ L anti cAMP-Cryptate (monoclonal antibody against cAMP, labeled with cryptate).
- the plates are incubated at room temperature for 1 hour and read on the Envision ((excitation 360nm; emission donor 615nm; emission acceptor 665nm). Results are calculated from the 665nm / 615nm ratio and expressed in Delta F% as described by manufacturer.
- Appropriate positive and negative control may be selected by a person of skill in the art and used to calculate z' and PIN values.
- the compounds of the invention are more potent against PDElA than against other PDE isoforms.
- the compounds are 2 fold more potent against PDElA than against one or more of the other isoforms.
- the compounds of the invention are 5 fold, particularly 10-fold, particularly 20-fold more potent against PDElA than against one or more of the other isoforms of PDE.
- the compounds of the invention are more potent against PDElA than against at least one of PDElB, PDE2A, PDE4A or PDE5A.
- the compounds are more potent against PDElA than against at least two of PDElB, PDE2A, PDE4A or PDE5A.
- the compounds are more potent against PDElA than against all of the other PDE isoforms.
- Methods for testing the selectivity of the compounds against a range of PDE isoforms will be familiar to those of skill in the art, and for example, may measure comparative IC50 values or percentage inhibition values at a set concentration. Typical methods are described below. [0318] To test the selectivity of the compounds against a panel of PDE's, lysate derived from transiently transfected HEK293 cells (transfected with PDE5A, PDElB, PDE2A or PDE4A for 48h) is used as the enzyme source.
- the dose response of compounds on PDE5A lysate is performed using the cGMP bulk htrf kit from Cisbio (catnr 62GM2PEC).
- the principle of this kit is based on the HTRF® technology (Homogeneous Time-Resolved Fluorescence).
- the method is based on the competition between native cGMP and the cGMP labeled with d2.
- the tracer binding is visualized by a monoclonal antibody against cGMP, labeled with Cryptate.
- the specific signal i.e. energy transfer
- PDE5A hydro lyses cGMP into 5'GMP; the decrease in cGMP concentration upon PDE5A activity will result in an increased signal.
- a PDE5A inhibitor will cause a decrease of this signal.
- reaction buffer consists of Tris 2OmM pH 7.4, 3mM MgCl 2 , 1.5mM CaCl 2 , 0.2mg/mL BSA and 0.001% Brij-35. After an incubation of 25 minutes at room temperature, the reaction is stopped by the addition of lO ⁇ L labeled cGMP-d2 and 10 ⁇ L anti-cGMP- Cryptate. After 1 hour incubation at room temperature, the readout is performed on the Envision (excitation 360nm; emission donor 615nm; emission acceptor 665nm).
- PDE2A and PDE4A lysates an assay using the cAMP dynamic 2 bulk htrf kit from Cisbio (catnr 62AM4PEC) is used.
- the principle of this kit is based on the HTRF® technology (Homogeneous Time-Resolved Fluorescence).
- the method is based on the competition between native cAMP and the cAMP labeled with d2.
- the tracer binding is visualized by a monoclonal antibody against cAMP, labeled with Cryptate.
- the specific signal i.e. energy transfer
- a mixture is made of 1 O ⁇ L with PDE IB, PDE2A or PDE4A lysate, 10OnM cAMP and the compound (5OnM in a final concentration of 1% DMSO) in a black 384- plate.
- the reaction buffer is Tris 2OmM pH 7.4, 37.5 U/ml calmodulin, 3mM MgCl 2 , 1.5mM CaCl 2 , 0.2mg/mL BSA and 0.001% Brij-35 ® .
- the reaction is stopped by the addition of 5 ⁇ L labelled cAMP-d2 and 5 ⁇ L anti-cAMP-Cryptate. After 1 hour incubation at room temperature, the readout is performed on the Envision (excitation 360nm; emission donor 615nm; emission acceptor 665nm).
- PDElB, PDE2A and PDE4A hydrolyse cAMP into 5'AMP; this decrease in cAMP concentration will result in an increase in signal.
- a PDElA, PDE2A or PDE4A inhibitor will result in a decrease of this signal.
- 1% DMSO (100% inhibition) may be used as a positive control, lysate with 1% DMSO
- the positive and negative control are used to calculate z' and PIN values.
- All compounds may be screened at a single concentration of 5OnM.
- the hit criteria is set at PIN 50 (50% inhibition).
- the mouse embryonic cell line ATDC5 is a cell line that can be induced to a chondrogenic fate by certain culturing conditions such as high cell density or certain growth factors.
- Anabolic compounds can be tested in this cell line for their capacity to induce or enhance the chondrogenic differentiation by measuring a typical chondrocyte markers such as collagen type II, alpha- 1 (col2 ⁇ l), a major constituent of normal cartilage.
- ATDC5 cells are seeded in 384 well plates and 3 days after plating treated with compounds. Col2 ⁇ l deposition is determined 14 days after the start of the infection.
- FK506 was described to induce chondrogenic differentiation in ATDC5 cells and increase collagen II production (Nishigaki et al, 2002, Eur J Pharmacol. FK506 induces chondrogenic differentiation of clonal mouse embryonic carcinoma cells, ATDC5). Assay description
- ATDC5 cells are seeded on day 0 at 1000 cells/well in 50 ⁇ L of DMEM/F12
- Up-regulation of Col2al is read at day 13: The medium is removed with a VacuSafe; 50 ⁇ L ice-cold MeOH is added and removed immediately by inverting the plate; 50 ⁇ L of ice-cold MeOH is added to fix the cells, and plates are incubated for 20 min at -20 0 C; MeOH is removed and plates are air- dried for 20 min, followed by 2x washing with 80 ⁇ L of phosphate buffered saline (PBS); 75 ⁇ L of blocking buffer (0.1% casein in PBS) is added and plates are incubated for at least 2 h at room temperature (RT). After the incubation the blocking buffer is removed; cells are washed with 25 ⁇ L of
- EC buffer (20 mM sodium phosphate, 2mM EDTA, 400 mM NaCl, 0.2% BSA, 0.05% CHAPS, 0.4% casein, 0.05% NaN3, pH 7) and 35 ⁇ L of the primary antibody (Collagen II Ab-2, Neomarkers MS-235-P) diluted 1/400 in buffer C (20 mM sodium phosphate, 2 mM EDTA, 400 mM NaCl, 1% BSA, pH 7) is added; plates are incubated overnight at 4°C.
- the primary antibody is removed; cells are washed once with 80 ⁇ L of PBST (0.5% Tween 20 in PBS) and once with 80 ⁇ Ll PBS; 35 ⁇ L of the secondary antibody (Goat-anti-mouse Immunoglobulins/HRP. DAKO, P0477; diluted 1/2000 in buffer C) is added; plates are incubated at RT for at least 45min but no longer than 1 h. After this incubation, the secondary antibody is removed and cells are washed twice with 80 ⁇ L PBST and once with 80 ⁇ L PBS;
- PDE nucleotide phosphodiesterase
Landscapes
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Organic Chemistry (AREA)
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
- Physical Education & Sports Medicine (AREA)
- Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
- General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
- Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
- Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Public Health (AREA)
- Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
- Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
Abstract
The present invention relates to compounds that are inhibitors of PDElA, a phosphodiesterase that is involved in the modulation of the degradation of cartilage, joint degeneration and diseases involving such degradation and/or inflammation, and particularly, to a compound according to formula I: or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate or prodrug thereof or isotopic variants thereof, stereoisomers or tautomers thereof. The invention extends to compositions, including pharmaceutical compositions, and corresponding uses thereof, and methods of prophylaxis and treatment involving the same.
Description
PYRAZOLEPYRIMIDINE COMPOUNDS USEFUL FOR THE TREATMENT OF DEGENERATIVE & INFLAMMATORY DISEASES
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Field of Invention
[0001] The present invention relates to compounds that are inhibitors of PDElA, a phosphodiesterase that is involved in the modulation of the degradation of cartilage, joint degeneration and diseases involving such degradation and/or inflammation.
[0002] Cartilage is an avascular tissue of which chondrocytes are the main cellular component.
The chondrocytes in normal articular cartilage occupy approximately 5% of the tissue volume, while the extra-cellular matrix makes up the remaining 95% of the tissue. The chondrocytes secrete the components of the matrix, mainly proteoglycans and collagens, which in turn supply the chondrocytes with an environment suitable for their survival under mechanical stress. In cartilage, collagen type II, together with the protein collagen type IX, is arranged in solid fibril-like structures, which provide cartilage with great mechanical strength. The proteoglycans can absorb water and are responsible for the resilient and shock absorbing properties of the cartilage.
[0003] One of the functional roles of cartilage in the joint is to allow bones to articulate on each other smoothly. Loss of articular cartilage, therefore, causes the bones to rub against each other leading to pain and loss of mobility. The degradation of cartilage can have various causes. In inflammatory arthritis, as in rheumatoid arthritis for example, cartilage degradation is caused by the secretion of proteases (e.g. collagenases) by inflamed tissues (the inflammed synovium for example). Cartilage degradation can also be the result of an injury of the cartilage, due to an accident or surgery, or exaggerated loading or 'wear and tear'. The ability of cartilage tissue to regenerate after such insults is limited. Chondrocytes in injured cartilage often display reduced cartilage synthesizing (anabolic) activity and/or increased cartilage degrading (catabolic) activity.
[0004] The degeneration of cartilage is the hallmark of various diseases, among which rheumatoid arthritis and osteoarthritis are the most prominent.
[0005] Rheumatoid arthritis (RA) is a chronic joint degenerative disease, characterized by inflammation and destruction of the joint structures. When the disease is unchecked, it leads to substantial disability and pain due to loss of joint functionality and even premature death. The aim of an RA therapy, therefore, is not to slow down the disease but to attain remission in order to stop the joint destruction. Besides the severity of the disease outcome, the high prevalence of RA (~ 0.8% of adults are affected worldwide) means a high socio-economic impact. (For reviews on RA, we refer to Smolen and Steiner (2003); Lee and Weinblatt (2001); Choy and Panayi (2001); O'Dell (2004) and Firestein (2003)). [0006] Osteoarthritis (also referred to as OA, or wear-and-tear arthritis) is the most common form of arthritis and is characterized by loss of articular cartilage, often associated with hypertrophy of the bone and pain. The disease mainly affects hands and weight-bearing joints such as knees, hips and spines. This process thins the cartilage. When the surface area has disappeared due to the thinning, a grade I osteoarthritis is reached; when the tangential surface area has disappeared, grade II osteoarthritis is
reached. There are further levels of degeneration and destruction, which affect the deep and the calcified cartilage layers that border with the subchondral bone. For an extensive review on Osteoarthritis, refer to Wieland et al, 2005.
[0007] The clinical manifestations of the development of the osteoarthritis condition include: increased volume of the joint, pain, crepitation and functional disability that, lead to pain and reduced mobility of the joints. When disease further develops, pain at rest emerges. If the condition persists without correction and/or therapy, the joint is destroyed leading to disability. Replacement surgery with total prosthesis is then required.
[0008] Therapeutic methods for the correction of the articular cartilage lesions that appear during the osteoarthritic disease have been developed, but so far none of them have been able to mediate the regeneration of articular cartilage in situ and in vivo.
[0009] Osteoarthritis is difficult to treat. At present, no cure is available and treatment focuses on relieving pain and preventing the affected joint from becoming deformed. Common treatments include the use of non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAID 's). Although the dietary supplements as chondroitin and glucosamine sulphate have been advocated as safe and effective options for the treatment of osteoarthritis, a recent clinical trial revealed that both treatments did not reduce pain associated to osteoarthritis. (Clegg et al., 2006). Taken together, no disease modifying osteoarthritic drugs are available.
[0010] In severe cases, joint replacement may be necessary. This is especially true for hips and knees. If a joint is extremely painful and cannot be replaced, it may be fused. This procedure stops the pain, but results in the permanent loss of joint function, making walking and bending difficult. [0011] Another possible treatment is the transplantation of cultured autologous chondrocytes.
Here chondral cellular material is taken from the patient, sent to a laboratory where it is expanded. The material is then implanted in the damaged tissues to cover the tissue's defects. [0012] Another treatment includes the intra-articular instillation of Hylan G-F 20 (Synvisc,
Hyalgan, Artz etc.), a substance that improves temporarily the rheology of the synovial fluid, producing an almost immediate sensation of free movement and a marked reduction of pain. [0013] Other reported methods include application of tendinous, periosteal, fascial, muscular or perichondral grafts; implantation of fibrin or cultured chondrocytes; implantation of synthetic matrices, such as collagen, carbon fiber; administration of electromagnetic fields. All of these have reported minimal and incomplete effects, resulting in a poor quality tissue that can neither support the weighted load nor allow the restoration of an articular function with normal movement.
[0014] Stimulation of the anabolic processes, blocking catabolic processes, or a combination of these two, may result in stabilization of the cartilage, and perhaps even reversion of the damage, and therefore prevent further progression of the disease. Various triggers may stimulate anabolic stimulation of chondrocytes. Insulin- like growth factor-I (IGF-I) is the predominant anabolic growth factor in synovial fluid and stimulates the synthesis of both proteoglycans and collagen. It has also been shown that members of the bone morphogenetic protein (BMP) family, notably BMP2, BMP4, BMP6, and BMP7, and members of the human transforming growth factor-b (TGF-b) family can induce chondrocyte anabolic
stimulation (Chubinskaya and Kuettner, 2003). A compound has recently been identified that induces anabolic stimulation of chondrocytes (US 6,500,854; EP 1.391211). However, most of these compounds show severe side effects and, consequently, there is a strong need for compounds that stimulate chondrocyte differentiation without these side effects.
[0015] Adenosine 3', 5'-cyclic monophosphate (cyclic AMP or cAMP) and guanosine 3', 5'- cyclic monophosphate (cyclic GMP or cGMP) are key second messenger molecules in cells which are synthesized by guanylyl and adenylyl cyclases. These molecules, by playing a role as 'relay' on signal transduction pathways, are key in controlling normal and pathological cell responses. Cyclic nucleotide phosphodiesterases (PDE's) are enzymes that hydrolyse cyclic nucleotides and thereby control the cellular levels of these second messenger molecules. Because of their key role in cellular signaling, PDE's are considered new therapeutic targets. Inhibition of PDE4 and PDE5 are accepted approaches for the treatment of asthma/chronic obstructive pulmonary disease and erectile dysfunction, respectively. As such, pharmaceutical industry has recently deployed a lot of efforts to develop PDE4 inhibitors (e.g. Cilomilast) and PDE5 inhibitors (e.g. sildenafil), some of which are marketed.
[0016] The diversity of the PDE family of enzymes (11 gene families (PDEl - PDEl 1) encoding more than 20 different PDE genes) allows a refined control over a variety of cellular processes. For an extensive review on PDE's, we refer to Lugnier, 2006. PDE's classically contain a catalytic domain, which is well conserved among different PDEs. In addition, PDE's contain regulatory domains. The activity of enzymes of the PDEl subfamily, for example, is regulated by Ca2+ and calmodulin as well as by phosphorylation. As such, the PDEl enzymes are involved in the complex interaction between the Ca + and cyclic nucleotide second messenger systems. Another feature of PDEl enzymes is their dual substrate specificity as they have the capacity to hydrolyse both cAMP and cGMP (Zhang et al., 2004). [0017] The generation of transgenic animals represents the best tool for the understanding of the specific physiological role of individual PDEs. In the PDEl subfamily, a PDElB knockout mouse has been generated and characterized. PDE1B(-/-) mice showed exaggerated hyperactivity after acute D- methamphetamine administration. PDE1B(-/-) and PDE1B(+/-) mice demonstrated spatial-learning deficits. These results indicate that enhancement of cyclic nucleotide signaling by inactivation of PDE IB- mediated cyclic nucleotide hydrolysis plays a significant role in the central nervous system, especially on the dopaminergic function (Reed et al., 2002). Less is known about the physiological role of the other members of the PDEl superfamily. A role for PDEl enzymes (PDElC in particular) in vascular tone (e.g.; in pulmonary hypertension) has been suggested (Murray et al., 2006). For an extensive review on PDEl enzymes, we refer to Kakkar et al., 1999 and Goraya and Cooper, 2005.
[0018] Several data point to a role of PDEs in chondrocyte biology. First, PDE4 and PDEl were identified as major PDE activities in chondrocytes (Tenor et al., 2002). The involvement of PDEs in cartilage catabolic events was further evidenced as follows. The ILl cytokine is responsible for cartilage catabolism by reducing the expression of matrix components, by inducing the expression of collagenases and inducible nitric oxide synthase (iNOS), which mediates the production of nitric oxide (NO). This event appears dependent on PDE activity, as IBMX, PDE5 inhibitor and PDE4 inhibitor treatment of chondrocytes reduced the induction of iNOS expression by ILl (Geng et al., 1998, Tenor et al., 2002).
The ability of PDE inhibitors to reduce iNOS expression appeared dependent on autocrine PGE2 production by the chondrocytes. Taken together, these data suggest a role for PDEs in cartilage catabolic events.
[0019] The current therapies are not satisfactory and therefore there remains a need to identify further compounds that may be of use in the treatment of degenerative joint diseases, e.g. osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis and osteoporosis. The present invention therefore provides compounds, methods for their manufacture and a pharmaceutical comprising a compound of the invention together with a suitable pharmaceutical carrier. The present invention also provides for the use of a compound of the invention in the preparation of a medicament for the treatment of degenerative joint diseases.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
[0020] The present invention is based on the discovery that inhibitors of PDElA are useful for the treatment of diseases involving cartilage degradation, joint degradation and/or inflammation, for example osteoarthritis. The present invention also provides methods for the production of these compounds, pharmaceutical compositions comprising these compounds and methods for treating diseases involving cartilage degradation, joint degradation and/or inflammation by administering a compound of the invention.
[0021] Accordingly, the present invention relates to compounds having anti-inflammatory properties, according to formula (I):
CyI is substituted or unsubstituted aryl or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl; R1 is H, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl;
R is H, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkylalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl;
R4 is alkyl substituted with halo, alkoxy, aryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl; and ml is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4; provided that when CyI is heterocycloalkyl and the heterocycloalkyl group is joined to -(CH2)mi- via a N atom of heterocycloalkyl group then ml is 2, 3 or 4; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate or prodrug thereof or isotopic variants thereof, stereoisomers or tautomers thereof.
[0022] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula I, the compound is according to formulae Ia or Ib:
Ia Ib wherein R1, R2, R4 and ml are as described for formula I;
Ar is substituted or unsubstituted aryl; and HetAr is substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl. [0023] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae Ia-Ib, R1 is alkyl. In another embodiment R1 is Me.
[0024] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae Ia-Ic, R2 is alkyl or cycloalkyl. In another embodiment R is alkyl.
[0025] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae Ia-Ib, R4 is alkyl.
[0026] Another aspect of this invention relates to the use of the present compound in a therapeutic method, a pharmaceutical composition, and the manufacture of such composition, useful for the treatment of a disease involving inflammation, and in particular, a disease characteristic of abnormal PDElA activity. This invention also relates to processes for the preparation of the present compounds. [0027] Other objects and advantages will become apparent to those skilled in the art from a consideration of the ensuing detailed description with reference to the following illustrative drawings.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
[0028] Figure 1. Shows the mechanism of the primary screening assay using the cAMP dynamic htrf kit from Cisbio.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
Definitions
[0029] The following terms are intended to have the meanings presented therewith below and are useful in understanding the description and intended scope of the present invention. [0030] When describing the invention, which may include compounds, pharmaceutical compositions containing such compounds and methods of using such compounds and compositions, the following terms, if present, have the following meanings unless otherwise indicated. It should also be understood that when described herein any of the moieties defined forth below may be substituted with a variety of substituents, and that the respective definitions are intended to include such substituted moieties within their scope as set out below. Unless otherwise stated, the term "substituted" is to be defined as set out below. It should be further understood that the terms "groups" and "radicals" can be considered interchangeable when used herein.
[0031] The articles "a" and "an" may be used herein to refer to one or to more than one (i.e. at least one) of the grammatical objects of the article. By way of example "an analogue" means one analogue or more than one analogue.
[0032] 'Acyl' or 'Alkanoyl' refers to a radical -C(O)R20, where R20 is hydrogen, Ci-C8 alkyl, C3-
Cio cycloalkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkylmethyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl as defined herein. Representative examples include, but are not limited to, formyl, acetyl, cyclohexylcarbonyl, cyclohexylmethylcarbonyl, benzoyl and benzylcarbonyl. Exemplary 'acyl' groups are -C(O)H, -C(O)-Ci-C8 alkyl, -C(O)-(CH2)t(C6-Ci0 aryl), -C(O)-(CH2)t(5-10 membered heteroaryl),
cycloalkyl), and -C(O)-(CH2)t(4- 10 membered heterocycloalkyl), wherein t is an integer from 0 to 4.
[0033] 'Substituted Acyl' or 'Substituted Alkanoyl' refers to a radical -C(O)R21, wherein R21 is independently
• Ci-C8 alkyl, substituted with halo or hydroxy; or
• C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C6-Ci0 aryl, arylalkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is substituted with unsubstituted C1-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted Ci-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy.
[0034] 'Acylamino' refers to a radical -NR22C(O)R23, where R22 is hydrogen, CrC8 alkyl, C3-
Ci0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C6-Ci0 aryl, arylalkyl, 5-10 memberd heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl and R23 is hydrogen, Ci-C8 alkyl, C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C6- Ci0 aryl, arylalkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl, as defined herein. Exemplary 'acylamino' include, but are not limited to, formylamino, acetylamino, cyclohexylcarbonylamino, cyclohexylmethyl-carbonylamino, benzoylamino and benzylcarbonylamino. Exemplary 'acylamino' groups are -NR21 C(O)-Ci-C8 alkyl, -NR21 C(O)-(CH2)t(C6-Ci0 aryl), -NR21 C(O)-(CH2)t(5-10 membered heteroaryl), -NR21 C(O)-(CH2)t(C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl), and -NR21 C(O)-(CH2)^- 10 membered heterocycloalkyl), wherein t is an integer from 0 to 4, each R21 independently represents H or Ci-C8 alkyl.
[0035] 'Substituted Acylamino' refers to a radical -NR24C(O)R25, wherein:
R24 is independently
• H, Ci-C8 alkyl, substituted with halo or hydroxy; or
• C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C6-Ci0 aryl, arylalkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is substituted with unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted Ci-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy; and
R25 is independently
• H, Ci-C8 alkyl, substituted with halo or hydroxy; or
• C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C6-CiO aryl, arylalkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is substituted with unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted Ci-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxyl; provided at least one of R24 and R25 is other than H.
[0036] 'Alkoxy' refers to the group -OR26 where R26 is Ci-Cg alkyl. Particular alkoxy groups are methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, tert-butoxy, sec-butoxy, n-pentoxy, n-hexoxy, and 1,2-dimethylbutoxy. Particular alkoxy groups are lower alkoxy, i.e. with between 1 and 6 carbon atoms. Further particular alkoxy groups have between 1 and 4 carbon atoms.
[0037] 'Substituted alkoxy' refers to an alkoxy group substituted with one or more of those groups recited in the definition of "substituted" herein, and particularly refers to an alkoxy group having 1 or more substituents, for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, and particularly from 1 to 3 substituents, in particular 1 substituent, selected from the group consisting of amino, substituted amino, C6-Ci0 aryl, -O- aryl, carboxyl, cyano, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, halogen, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, hydroxyl, nitro, thioalkoxy, thio-O-aryl, thiol, alkyl-S(O)-, aryl-S(O)-, alkyl-S(O)2- and aryl- S(O)2". Exemplary 'substituted alkoxy' groups are -0-(CH2)t(C6-Cio aryl), -O-(CH2)t(5-10 membered heteroaryl), -0-(CH2)t(C3-Cio cycloalkyl), and -O-(CH2)t(4- 10 membered heterocycloalkyl), wherein t is an integer from 0 to 4 and any aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted Ci-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy. Particular exemplary 'substituted alkoxy' groups are OCF3, OCH2CF3, OCH2Ph, OCH2-cyclopropyl, OCH2CH2OH, OCH2CH2NMe2.
[0038] 'Alkoxycarbonyl' refers to a radical -C(O)-OR27 where R27 represents an Ci-C8 alkyl, C3-
Cio cycloalkyl, C3-CiO cycloalkylalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkylalkyl, aralkyl, or 5-10 membered heteroarylalkyl as defined herein. Exemplary "alkoxycarbonyl" groups are C(O)O-Ci-Cg alkyl, -C(O)O- (CH2WC6-CiO aryl), -C(O)O-(CH2)t(5-10 membered heteroaryl), -C(O)O-(CH2WC3-Ci0 cycloalkyl), and -C(O)O-(CH2)t(4- 10 membered heterocycloalkyl), wherein t is an integer from 1 to 4. [0039] 'Substituted Alkoxycarbonyl' refers to a radical -C(O)-OR28 where R28 represents:
• Ci-Cg alkyl, C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl, C3-Ci0 cycloalkylalkyl, or 4-10 membered heterocycloalkylalkyl, each of which is substituted with halo, substituted or unsubstituted amino, or hydroxy; or
• C6-Ci0 aralkyl, or 5-10 membered heteroarylalkyl, each of which is substituted with unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted Ci-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxyl.
[0040] '-O-arylcarbonyl' refers to a radical -C(O)-OR29 where R29 represents an C6-Ci0 aryl, as defined herein. Exemplary "-O-arylcarbonyl" groups is -C(O)O-(C6-Ci0 aryl).
[0041] 'Substituted -O-arylcarbonyl' refers to a radical -C(O)-OR30 where R30 represents a
• C6-Ci0 aryl, substituted with unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted Ci-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxyl.
[0042] 'Hetero-O-arylcarbonyl' refers to a radical -C(O)-OR31 where R31 represents a 5-10 membered heteroaryl, as defined herein
[0043] 'Substituted Hetero-O-arylcarbonyl' refers to a radical -C(O)-OR32 where R32 represents a:
• 5-10 membered heteroaryl, substituted with unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted Ci-
C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted
C1-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxyl.
[0044] 'Alkyl' means straight or branched aliphatic hydrocarbon having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
Particular alkyl has 1 to 12 carbon atoms. More particular is lower alkyl which has 1 to 6 carbon atoms. A further particular group has 1 to 4 carbon atoms. Exemplary straight chained groups include methyl, ethyl n-propyl, and n-butyl. Branched means that one or more lower alkyl groups such as methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl is attached to a linear alkyl chain, exemplary branched chain groups include isopropyl, iso-butyl, t-butyl and isoamyl.
[0045] 'Substituted alkyl' refers to an alkyl group as defined above substituted with one or more of those groups recited in the definition of "substituted" herein, and particularly refers to an alkyl group having 1 or more substituents, for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, and particularly from 1 to 3 substituents, in particular 1 substituent, selected from the group consisting of acyl, acylamino, acyloxy (- O-acyl or -OC(O)R20), alkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylamino (-NR -alkoxycarbonyl or -NH- C(O)-OR27), amino, substituted amino, aminocarbonyl (carbamoyl or amido or -C(O)-NR 2), aminocarbonylamino (-NR -C(O)-NR 2), aminocarbonyloxy (-O-C(O)-NR 2), aminosulfonyl, sulfonylamino, aryl, -O-aryl, azido, carboxyl, cyano, cycloalkyl, halogen, hydroxy, heteroaryl, nitro, thiol, -S-alkyl, -S-aryl, -S(O)-alkyl,-S(O)-aryl, -S(O)2-alkyl, and -S(O)2-aryl. In a particular embodiment 'substituted alkyl' refers to a Ci-Cg alkyl group substituted with halo, cyano, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, azido, -NR "SO2R", -SO2NR "R", -C(O)R", -C(O)OR", -OC(O)R", - NR'"C(O)R", -C(O)NR R", -NR"R ", or -(CR'"R"")mOR"; wherein each R" is independently selected from H, Ci-C8 alkyl, -(CH2XC6-Ci0 aryl), -(CH2)t(5-10 membered heteroaryl), -(CH2XC3-Ci0 cycloalkyl), and -(CH2)t(4- 10 membered heterocycloalkyl), wherein t is an integer from O to 4 and any aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C1-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy. Each of R and R independently represents H or Ci-C8 alkyl.
[0046] 'Amino' refers to the radical -NH2.
[0047] 'Substituted amino' refers to an amino group substituted with one or more of those groups recited in the definition of 'substituted' herein, and particularly refers to the group -N(R )2 where each R33 is independently selected from:
• hydrogen, Ci-C8 alkyl, C6-Ci0 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, or Cs-Ci0 cycloalkyl; or
• Ci-C8 alkyl, substituted with halo or hydroxy; or
• -(CH2XC6-Ci0 aryl), -(CH2)t(5-10 membered heteroaryl), -(CH2XC3-Ci0 cycloalkyl) or - (CH2)t(4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl) wherein t is an integer between 0 and 8, each of
which is substituted by unsubstituted C1-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C1-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted Ci-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy; or
• both R groups are joined to form an alkylene group.
When both R33 groups are hydrogen, -N(R33)2 is an amino group. Exemplary 'substituted amino' groups are -NR33'-CrC8 alkyl, -NR33'-(CH2)t(C6-Ci0 aryl), -NR33'-(CH2)t(5-10 membered heteroaryl), -NR33'-(CH2)t(C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl), and -NR33'-(CH2)t(4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl), wherein t is an integer from 0 to 4, each R independently represents H or Ci-
Cg alkyl; and any alkyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by halo, substituted or unsubstituted amino, or hydroxy; and any aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted Ci-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy. For the avoidance of doubt the term "substituted amino" includes the groups alkylamino, substituted alkylamino, alkylarylamino, substituted alkylarylamino, arylamino, substituted arylamino, dialkylamino and substituted dialkylamino as defined below.
[0048] 'Alkylamino' refers to the group -NHR34, wherein R34 is Ci-C8 alkyl.
[0049] 'Substituted Alkylamino' refers to the group -NHR35, wherein R35 is Ci-C8 alkyl; and the alkyl group is substituted with halo, substituted or unsubstituted amino, hydroxy, C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C6-Ci0 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, aralkyl or heteroaralkyl; and any aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted
Ci-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy.
[0050] 'Alkylarylamino' refers to the group -NR36R37, wherein R36 is C6-Ci0 aryl and R37 is Cr
C8 alkyl.
[0051] 'Substituted Alkylarylamino' refers to the group -NR38R39, wherein R38 is C6-Ci0 aryl and
R39 is Ci-C8 alkyl; and the alkyl group is substituted with halo, substituted or unsubstituted amino, hydroxy, C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C6-Ci0 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, aralkyl or heteroaralkyl; and any aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkyl, halo, cyano, unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted Ci-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy.
[0052] 'Arylamino' means a radical -NHR40 where R40 is selected from C6-Ci0 aryl and 5-10 membered heteroaryl as defined herein.
[0053] 'Substituted Arylamino' refers to the group -NHR41, wherein R41 is independently selected from C6-Ci0 aryl and 5-10 membered heteroaryl; and any aryl or heteroaryl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkyl, halo, cyano, unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted Ci-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy.
[0054] 'Dialkylamino' refers to the group -NR42R43, wherein each of R42 and R43 are independently selected from Ci-C8 alkyl.
[0055] 'Substituted Dialkylamino' refers to the group -NR44R45, wherein each of R44 and R45 are independently selected from Ci-C8 alkyl; and the alkyl group is independently substituted with halo, hydroxy, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C6-Ci0 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, aralkyl or heteroaralkyl; and any aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted C1-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C1-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted
C1-4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted Ci-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy.
[0056] 'Diarylamino' refers to the group -NR46R47, wherein each of R46 and R47 are independently selected from C6-Ci0 aryl.
[0057] "Aminosulfonyl" or "Sulfonamide" refers to the radical -S(O2)NH2.
[0058] "Substituted aminosulfonyl" or "substituted sulfonamide" refers to a radical such as -
S(O2)N(R48)2 wherein each R48 is independently selected from:
• H, Ci-C8 alkyl, C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C6-Ci0 aryl, aralkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, and heteroaralkyl; or
• Ci-C8 alkyl substituted with halo or hydroxy; or
• C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C6-Ci0 aryl, aralkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or heteroaralkyl, substituted by unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted Ci-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy; provided that at least one R48 is other than H.
[0059] Exemplary 'substituted aminosulfonyl' or 'substituted sulfonamide' groups are -
S(O2)N(R48')-Ci-C8 alkyl, -S(O2)N(R48')-(CH2)t(C6-Ci0 aryl), -S(O2)N(R48')-(CH2)t(5-10 membered heteroaryl), -S(O2)N(R4" )-(CH2)t(C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl), and -S(O2)N(R4" )-(CH2)t(4- 10 membered heterocycloalkyl), wherein t is an integer from 0 to 4; each R48 independently represents H or Ci-C8 alkyl; and any aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted Ci-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy.
[0060] 'Aralkyl' or 'arylalkyP refers to an alkyl group, as defined above, substituted with one or more aryl groups, as defined above. Particular aralkyl or arylalkyl groups are alkyl groups substituted with one aryl group.
[0061] 'Substituted Aralkyl' or 'substituted arylalkyl' refers to an alkyl group, as defined above, substituted with one or more aryl groups; and at least one of any aryl group present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkyl, halo, cyano, unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted Ci-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy.
[0062] 'Aryl' refers to a monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon group derived by the removal of one hydrogen atom from a single carbon atom of a parent aromatic ring system. In particular aryl refers to an aromatic ring structure, mono-cyclic or poly-cyclic that includes from 5 to 12 ring members, more
usually 6 to 10. Where the aryl group is a monocyclic ring system it preferentially contains 6 carbon atoms. Typical aryl groups include, but are not limited to, groups derived from aceanthrylene, acenaphthylene, acephenanthrylene, anthracene, azulene, benzene, chrysene, coronene, fluoranthene, fluorene, hexacene, hexaphene, hexalene, as-indacene, s-indacene, indane, indene, naphthalene, octacene, octaphene, octalene, ovalene, penta-2,4-diene, pentacene, pentalene, pentaphene, perylene, phenalene, phenanthrene, picene, pleiadene, pyrene, pyranthrene, rubicene, triphenylene and trinaphthalene. Particularly aryl groups include phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, and tetrahydronaphthyl.
[0063] 'Substituted Aryl' refers to an aryl group substituted with one or more of those groups recited in the definition of 'substituted' herein, and particularly refers to an aryl group that may optionally be substituted with 1 or more substituents, for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, particularly 1 to 3 substituents, in particular 1 substituent. Particularly, 'Substituted Aryl' refers to an aryl group substituted with one or more of groups selected from halo, Ci-C8 alkyl, Ci-C8 haloalkyl, Ci-C8 haloalkoxy, cyano, hydroxy, Ci-C8 alkoxy, and amino. [0064] Examples of representative substituted aryls include the following
[0065] In these formulae one of R49 and R50 may be hydrogen and at least one of R49 and R50 is each independently selected from Ci-C8 alkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, alkanoyl, Ci-C8 alkoxy, hetero-O-aryl, alkylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, NR51COR52, NR51SOR52NR51SO2R52, COOalkyl,
COOaryl, CONR51R52, CONR51OR52, NR51R52, SO2NR51R52, S-alkyl, SOalkyl, S02alkyl, Saryl, SOaryl,
S02aryl; or R49 and R50 may be joined to form a cyclic ring (saturated or unsaturated) from 5 to 8 atoms, optionally containing one or more heteroatoms selected from the group N, O or S. R51, and R52 are independently hydrogen, Ci-C8 alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C6-Ci0 aryl, substituted aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl.
[0066] 'Arylalkyloxy' refers to an -O-alkylaryl radical where alkylaryl is as defined herein.
[0067] 'Substituted Arylalkyloxy' refers to an -O-alkylaryl radical where alkylaryl is as defined herein; and any aryl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkyl, halo, cyano, unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Cr4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted Ci-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy.
[0068] 'Azido' refers to the radical -N3.
[0069] 'Carbamoyl or amido' refers to the radical -C(O)NH2.
[0070] 'Substituted Carbamoyl or substituted amido' refers to the radical -C(O)N(R5 )2 wherein each R53 is independently
• H, Ci-C8 alkyl, C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C6-Ci0 aryl, aralkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, and heteroaralkyl; or
• Ci-C8 alkyl substituted with halo or hydroxy; or
• C3-C10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, Cβ-Cio aryl, aralkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or heteroaralkyl, each of which is substituted by unsubstituted C1-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted Ci-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy; provided that at least one R53 is other than H.
Exemplary 'Substituted Amido / Carbamoyl' groups are -C(O) NR53'-CrC8 alkyl, -C(O)NR53'- (CH2WC6-CiO aryl), -C(O)N53'-(CH2)t(5-10 membered heteroaryl), -C(O)NR53'-(CH2)t(C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl), and -C(O)NR5 -(CH2)t(4- 10 membered heterocycloalkyl), wherein t is an integer from 0 to 4, each R53 independently represents H or Ci-Cg alkyl and any aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted Ci-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy. [0071] 'Carboxy' refers to the radical -C(O)OH.
[0072] 'Cycloalkyl' refers to cyclic non-aromatic hydrocarbyl groups having from 3 to 10 carbon atoms. Such cycloalkyl groups include, by way of example, single ring structures such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, and cyclooctyl.
[0073] 'Substituted cycloalkyl' refers to a cycloalkyl group as defined above substituted with one or more of those groups recited in the definition of 'substituted' herein, and particularly refers to a cycloalkyl group having 1 or more substituents, for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, and particularly from 1 to 3 substituents, in particular 1 substituent. [0074] 'Cyano' refers to the radical -CN.
[0075] 'Halo' or 'halogen' refers to fluoro (F), chloro (Cl), bromo (Br) and iodo (I). Particular halo groups are either fluoro or chloro.
[0076] 'Hetero' when used to describe a compound or a group present on a compound means that one or more carbon atoms in the compound or group have been replaced by a nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur heteroatom. Hetero may be applied to any of the hydrocarbyl groups described above such as alkyl, e.g. heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, e.g. heterocycloalkyl, aryl, e.g. heteroaryl, cycloalkenyl, e.g. cycloheteroalkenyl, and the like having from 1 to 5, and particularly from 1 to 3 heteroatoms. [0077] 'Heteroaryl' means an aromatic ring structure, mono-cyclic or polycyclic, that includes one or more heteroatoms and 5 to 12 ring members, more usually 5 to 10 ring members. The heteroaryl group can be, for example, a five membered or six membered monocyclic ring or a bicyclic structure formed from fused five and six membered rings or two fused six membered rings or, by way of a further example, two fused five membered rings. Each ring may contain up to four heteroatoms typically selected from nitrogen, sulphur and oxygen. Typically the heteroaryl ring will contain up to 4 heteroatoms, more typically up to 3 heteroatoms, more usually up to 2, for example a single heteroatom. In one embodiment, the heteroaryl ring contains at least one ring nitrogen atom. The nitrogen atoms in the heteroaryl rings can be basic, as in the case of an imidazole or pyridine, or essentially non-basic as in the case of an indole or pyrrole nitrogen. In general the number of basic nitrogen atoms present in the heteroaryl group, including
any amino group substituents of the ring, will be less than five. Examples of five membered monocyclic heteroaryl groups include but are not limited to pyrrole, furan, thiophene, imidazole, furazan, oxazole, oxadiazole, oxatriazole, isoxazole, thiazole, isothiazole, pyrazole, triazole and tetrazole groups. Examples of six membered monocyclic heteroaryl groups include but are not limited to pyridine, pyrazine, pyridazine, pyrimidine and triazine. Particular examples of bicyclic heteroaryl groups containing a five membered ring fused to another five membered ring include but are not limited to imidazothiazole and imidazoimidazole. Particular examples of bicyclic heteroaryl groups containing a six membered ring fused to a five membered ring include but are not limited to benzfuran, benzthiophene, benzimidazole, benzoxazole, isobenzoxazole, benzisoxazole, benzthiazole, benzisothiazole, isobenzofuran, indole, isoindole, isoindolone, indolizine, indoline, isoindoline, purine (e.g., adenine, guanine), indazole, pyrazolopyrimidine, triazolopyrimidine, benzodioxole and pyrazolopyridine groups. Particular examples of bicyclic heteroaryl groups containing two fused six membered rings include but are not limited to quinoline, isoquinoline, chroman, thiochroman, chromene, isochromene, chroman, isochroman, benzodioxan, quinolizine, benzoxazine, benzodiazine, pyridopyridine, quinoxaline, quinazoline, cinnoline, phthalazine, naphthyridine and pteridine groups. Particular heteroaryl groups are those derived from thiophene, pyrrole, benzothiophene, benzofuran, indole, pyridine, quinoline, imidazole, oxazole and pyrazine.
[0078] Examples of representative aryl having hetero atoms containing substitution include the following:
wherein each W is selected from C(R , 5344 Λ^, NR , 5344, O and S; and each Y is selected from carbonyl, NR54, O and S; and R54 is independently hydrogen, Ci-Cg alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C6-Ci0 aryl, and 5-10 membered heteroaryl. [0079] Examples of representative heteroaryls include the following:
wherein each Y is selected from carbonyl, N, NR55, O and S; and R55 is independently hydrogen, Ci-C8 alkyl, C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C6-Ci0 aryl, and 5-10 membered heteroaryl.
[0080] As used herein, the term 'heterocycloalkyl' refers to a 4-10 membered, stable heterocyclic non-aromatic ring and/or including rings containing one or more heteroatoms independently selected from N, O and S, fused thereto. A fused heterocyclic ring system may include carbocyclic rings and need only include one heterocyclic ring. Examples of heterocyclic rings include, but are not limited to, morpholine, piperidine (e.g. 1 -piperidinyl, 2-piperidinyl, 3-piperidinyl and 4-piperidinyl), pyrrolidine (e.g. 1 -pyrrolidinyl, 2-pyrrolidinyl and 3-pyrrolidinyl), pyrrolidone, pyran (2H-pyran or 4H-pyran), dihydrothiophene, dihydropyran, dihydrofuran, dihydrothiazole, tetrahydrofuran, tetrahydrothiophene, dioxane, tetrahydropyran (e.g. 4-tetrahydro pyranyl), imidazoline, imidazolidinone, oxazoline, thiazoline, 2-pyrazoline, pyrazolidine, piperazine, and N-alkyl piperazines such as N-methyl piperazine. Further examples include thiomorpholine and its S-oxide and S,S-dioxide (particularly thiomorpholine). Still further examples include azetidine, piperidone, piperazone, and N-alkyl piperidines such as N-methyl piperidine. Particular examples of heterocycloalkyl groups are shown in the following illustrative examples:
wherein each W is selected from CR ) 56 , / C~v(τR) 56' )2, NR , O and S; and each Y is selected from NR , O and S; and R56 is independently hydrogen, Ci-C8 alkyl, C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, Cβ-Cio aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, These heterocycloalkyl rings may be optionally substituted with one or more groups selected from the group consisting of acyl, acylamino, acyloxy (-O-acyl or - OC(O)R20), alkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylamino (-NR -alkoxycarbonyl or -NH-C(O)-OR27), amino, substituted amino, aminocarbonyl (amido or -C(O)-NR 2), aminocarbonylamino (-NR -C(O)- NR 2), aminocarbonyloxy (-O-C(O)-NR 2), aminosulfonyl, sulfonylamino, aryl, -O-aryl, azido, carboxyl, cyano, cycloalkyl, halogen, hydroxy, nitro, thiol, -S-alkyl, -S-aryl, -S(O)-alkyl,-S(O)-aryl, -S(0)2-alkyl, and -S(0)2-aryl. Substituting groups include carbonyl or thiocarbonyl which provide, for example, lactam and urea derivatives.
[0081] 'Hydroxy' refers to the radical -OH.
[0082] 'Nitro' refers to the radical -NO2.
[0083] 'Substituted' refers to a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms are each independently replaced with the same or different substituent(s). Typical substituents may be selected from the group consisting of: halogen, -R57, -O", =0, -OR57, -SR57, -S", =S, -NR57R58, =NR57, -CCl3, -CF3, -CN, -OCN, -SCN, - NO, -NO2, =N2, -N3, -S(O)2O", -S(O)2OH, -S(O)2R57, -OS(O2)O", -OS(O)2R57, -P(O)(O )2, - P(O)(OR57XO"), -OP(O)(OR57XOR58), -C(O)R57, -C(S)R57, -C(O)OR57, -C(O)NR57R58, -C(O)O",
-C(S)OR57, -NR59C(O)NR57R58, -NR59C(S)NR57R58, -NR60C(NR59)NR57R58 and
-C(NR59)NR57R58; wherein each R57, R58, R59 and R60 are independently:
• hydrogen, Ci-Cg alkyl, C6-Ci0 aryl, arylalkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl; or
• Ci-C8 alkyl substituted with halo or hydroxy; or
• C6-Ci0 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, C6-Ci0 cycloalkyl or 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl substituted by unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted Ci- C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy.
In a particular embodiment, substituted groups are substituted with one or more substituents, particularly with 1 to 3 substituents, in particular with one substituent group.
In a further particular embodiment the substituent group or groups are selected from: halo, cyano, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, azido, -NR "SO2R ", -SO2NR R", -C(O)R", -C(O)OR", -OC(O)R", - NR'"C(O)R", -C(O)NR R", -NR"R", -(CR"'R"')mOR", wherein, each R" is independently selected from H, Ci-C8 alkyl, -(CH2)t(C6-Ci0 aryl), -(CH2)t(5-10 membered heteroaryl), -(CH2)t(C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl), and - (CH2)t(4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl), wherein t is an integer from 0 to 4; and
• any alkyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by halo or hydroxy; and
• any aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted C1-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C1-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted Ci-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy. Each R independently represents H or Ci-C6alkyl.
[0084] 'Substituted sulfanyl' refers to the group -SR61, wherein R61 is selected from:
• Ci-C8 alkyl, C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C6-Ci0 aryl, aralkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, and heteroaralkyl; or
• Ci-C8 alkyl substituted with halo, substituted or unsubstituted amino, or hydroxy; or
• C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C6-Ci0 aryl, aralkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or heteroaralkyl, each of which is substituted by unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted Ci-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy.
[0085] Exemplary 'substituted sulfanyl' groups are -S-(Ci-C8 alkyl) and -S-(C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl),
-S-(CH2)t(C6-Cio aryl), -S-(CH2)t(5-10 membered heteroaryl), -S-(CH2)t(C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl), and -S- (CH2)t(4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl), wherein t is an integer from 0 to 4 and any aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted Ci-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy. The term 'substituted sulfanyl' includes the groups 'alkylsulfanyl' or 'alkylthio', 'substituted alkylthio' or 'substituted alkylsulfanyl', 'cycloalkylsulfanyl' or
'cycloalkylthio', 'substituted cycloalkylsulfanyl' or 'substituted cycloalkylthio', 'arylsulfanyl' or
'arylthio' and 'heteroarylsulfanyl' or 'heteroarylthio' as defined below.
[0086] 'Alkylthio' or 'Alkylsulfanyl' refers to a radical -SR62 where R62 is a Ci-C8 alkyl or group as defined herein. Representative examples include, but are not limited to, methylthio, ethylthio, propylthio and butylthio.
[0087] 'Substituted Alkylthio'or 'substituted alkylsulfanyl' refers to the group -SR63 where R63 is a Ci-Cg alkyl, substituted with halo, substituted or unsubstituted amino, or hydroxy.
[0088] 'Cycloalkylthio' or 'Cycloalkylsulfanyl' refers to a radical -SR64 where R64 is a C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl or group as defined herein. Representative examples include, but are not limited to, cyclopropylthio, cyclohexylthio, and cyclopentylthio.
[0089] 'Substituted cycloalkylthio' or 'substituted cycloalkylsulfanyl' refers to the group -SR65 where R65 is a C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl, substituted with halo, substituted or unsubstituted amino, or hydroxy.
[0090] 'Arylthio' or 'Arylsulfanyl' refers to a radical -SR66 where R66 is a C6-Ci0 aryl group as defined herein.
[0091] 'Heteroarylthio' or 'Heteroarylsulfanyl' refers to a radical -SR67 where R67 is a 5-10 membered heteroaryl group as defined herein.
[0092] 'Substituted sulfmyl' refers to the group -S(O)R68, wherein R68 is selected from:
• Ci-C8 alkyl, C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C6-Ci0 aryl, aralkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, and heteroaralkyl; or
• Ci-C8 alkyl substituted with halo, substituted or unsubstituted amino, or hydroxy; or
• C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C6-Ci0 aryl, aralkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or heteroaralkyl, substituted by unsubstituted C1-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C1-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted Ci-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy.
[0093] Exemplary 'substituted sulfmyl' groups are -S(O)-(Ci-C8 alkyl) and -S(O)-(C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl), -S(O)-(CH2WC6-Ci0 aryl), -S(O)-(CH2)t(5-10 membered heteroaryl), -S(O)-(CH2)t(C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl), and -S(O)-(CH2)t(4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl), wherein t is an integer from 0 to 4 and any aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted Ci-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy. The term substituted sulfmyl includes the groups 'alkylsulfinyl', 'substituted alkylsulfinyl', 'cycloalkylsulfinyl', 'substituted cycloalkylsulfinyl', 'arylsulfinyl' and 'heteroarylsulfinyl' as defined herein.
[0094] 'Alkylsulfinyl' refers to a radical -S(O)R69 where R69 is a Ci-C8 alkyl group as defined herein. Representative examples include, but are not limited to, methylsulfinyl, ethylsulfinyl, propylsulfinyl and butylsulfinyl.
[0095] 'Substituted Alkylsulfinyl' refers to a radical -S(O)R70 where R70 is a Q-C8 alkyl group as defined herein, substituted with halo, substituted or unsubstituted amino, or hydroxy.
[0096] 'Cycloalkylsulfinyl' refers to a radical -S(O)R71 where R71 is a C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl or group as defined herein. Representative examples include, but are not limited to, cyclopropylsulfinyl, cyclohexylsulfinyl, and cyclopentylsulfinyl.
[0097] 'Substituted cycloalkylsulfinyl' refers to the group -S(O)R72 where R72 is a C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl, substituted with halo, substituted or unsubstituted amino, or hydroxy.
[[00009988]] 'Arylsulfmyl' refers to a radical -S(O)R73 where R73 is a C6-Ci0 aryl group as defined herein.
[[00009999]] 'Heteroarylsulfinyl' refers to a radical -S(O)R74 where R74 is a 5-10 membered heteroaryl group as defined herein.
[00100] ' Substituted sulfonyl' refers to the group -S(O)2R75, wherein R75 is selected from:
• Ci-C8 alkyl, C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C6-Ci0 aryl, aralkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, and heteroaralkyl; or
• Ci-C8 alkyl substituted with halo, substituted or unsubstituted amino, or hydroxy; or
• C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C6-Ci0 aryl, aralkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or heteroaralkyl, each of which is substituted by unsubstituted Ci -C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted Ci-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy.
[00101] Exemplary 'substituted sulfonyl' groups are -S(O)2-(CrC8 alkyl) and -S(O)2-(C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl), -S(O)2-(CH2)t(C6-Ci0 aryl), -S(O)2-(CH2)t(5-10 membered heteroaryl), -S(O)2-(CH2)t(C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl), and -S(O)2-(CH2)t(4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl), wherein t is an integer from 0 to 4 and any aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted
Ci-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy. The term substituted sulfonyl includes the groups alkylsulfonyl, substituted alkylsulfonyl, cycloalkylsulfonyl, substituted cycloalkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl and heteroarylsulfonyl.
[00102] 'Alkylsulfonyl' refers to a radical -S(O)2R76 where R76 is an Ci-C8 alkyl group as defined herein. Representative examples include, but are not limited to, methylsulfonyl, ethylsulfonyl, propylsulfonyl and butylsulfonyl.
[00103] 'Substituted Alkylsulfonyl' refers to a radical -S(O)2R77 where R77 is an Ci-C8 alkyl group as defined herein, substituted with halo, substituted or unsubstituted amino, or hydroxy.
[00104] 'Cycloalkylsulfonyl' refers to a radical -S(O)2R78 where R78 is a C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl or group as defined herein. Representative examples include, but are not limited to, cyclopropylsulfonyl, cyclohexylsulfonyl, and cyclopentylsulfonyl.
[00105] 'Substituted cycloalkylsulfonyl' refers to the group -S(O)2R79 where R79 is a C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl, substituted with halo, substituted or unsubstituted amino, or hydroxy.
[00106] 'Arylsulfonyl' refers to a radical -S(O)2R80 where R80 is an C6-Ci0 aryl group as defined herein.
[00107] 'Heteroarylsulfonyl' refers to a radical -S(O)2R81 where R81 is an 5-10 membered heteroaryl group as defined herein.
[00108] 'Sulfo' or 'sulfonic acid' refers to a radical such as -SO3H.
[00109] 'Substituted sulfo' or 'sulfonic acid ester' refers to the group -S(O)2OR82, wherein R82 is selected from:
• Ci-C8 alkyl, C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C6-Ci0 aryl, aralkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, and heteroaralkyl; or
• Ci-C8 alkyl substituted with halo, substituted or unsubstituted amino, or hydroxy; or
• C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C6-Ci0 aryl, aralkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or heteroaralkyl, each of which is substituted by unsubstituted Ci -C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted Ci-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy.
[00110] Exemplary 'Substituted sulfo' or 'sulfonic acid ester' groups are -S(O)2-O-(Ci-C8 alkyl) and -S(O)2-O-(C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl), -S(O)2-O-(CH2WC6-Ci0 aryl), -S(O)2-O-(CH2)t(5-10 membered heteroaryl), -S(O)2-O-(CH2X(C3-Ci0 cycloalkyl), and -S(O)2-O-(CH2)t(4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl), wherein t is an integer from 0 to 4 and any aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted Ci-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted Ci-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted Ci-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy.
[00111] 'Thiol' refers to the group -SH.
[00112] One having ordinary skill in the art of organic synthesis will recognize that the maximum number of heteroatoms in a stable, chemically feasible heterocyclic ring, whether it is aromatic or non aromatic, is determined by the size of the ring, the degree of unsaturation and the valence of the heteroatoms. In general, a heterocyclic ring may have one to four heteroatoms so long as the heteroaromatic ring is chemically feasible and stable.
[00113] 'Pharmaceutically acceptable' means approved or approvable by a regulatory agency of the Federal or a state government or the corresponding agency in countries other than the United States, or that is listed in the U.S. Pharmacopoeia or other generally recognized pharmacopoeia for use in animals, and more particularly, in humans.
[00114] 'Pharmaceutically acceptable salt' refers to a salt of a compound of the invention that is pharmaceutically acceptable and that possesses the desired pharmacological activity of the parent compound. In particular, such salts are non-toxic may be inorganic or organic acid addition salts and base addition salts. Specifically, such salts include: (1) acid addition salts, formed with inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like; or formed with organic acids such as acetic acid, propionic acid, hexanoic acid, cyclopentanepropionic acid, glycolic acid, pyruvic acid, lactic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, malic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, 3-(4-hydroxybenzoyl) benzoic acid, cinnamic acid, mandelic acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, 1,2-ethane-disulfonic acid, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonic acid,
benzenesulfonic acid, 4-chlorobenzenesulfonic acid, 2-naphthalenesulfonic acid, 4-toluenesulfonic acid, camphorsulfonic acid, 4-methylbicyclo[2.2.2]-oct-2-ene-l-carboxylic acid, glucoheptonic acid, 3- phenylpropionic acid, trimethylacetic acid, tertiary butylacetic acid, lauryl sulfuric acid, gluconic acid, glutamic acid, hydroxynaphthoic acid, salicylic acid, stearic acid, muconic acid, and the like; or (2) salts formed when an acidic proton present in the parent compound either is replaced by a metal ion, e.g., an alkali metal ion, an alkaline earth ion, or an aluminum ion; or coordinates with an organic base such as ethanolamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine, N-methylglucamine and the like. Salts further include, by way of example only, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, ammonium, tetraalkylammonium, and the like; and when the compound contains a basic functionality, salts of non toxic organic or inorganic acids, such as hydrochloride, hydrobromide, tartrate, mesylate, acetate, maleate, oxalate and the like. The term "pharmaceutically acceptable cation" refers to an acceptable cationic counter-ion of an acidic functional group. Such cations are exemplified by sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, ammonium, tetraalkylammonium cations, and the like.
[00115] 'Pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle' refers to a diluent, adjuvant, excipient or carrier with which a compound of the invention is administered.
[00116] 'Prodrugs' refers to compounds, including derivatives of the compounds of the invention, which have cleavable groups and become by solvolysis or under physiological conditions the compounds of the invention which are pharmaceutically active in vivo. Such examples include, but are not limited to, choline ester derivatives and the like, N-alkylmorpholine esters and the like. [00117] 'Solvate' refers to forms of the compound that are associated with a solvent, usually by a solvolysis reaction. This physical association includes hydrogen bonding. Conventional solvents include water, ethanol, acetic acid and the like. The compounds of the invention may be prepared e.g. in crystalline form and may be solvated or hydrated. Suitable solvates include pharmaceutically acceptable solvates, such as hydrates, and further include both stoichiometric solvates and non-stoichiometric solvates. In certain instances the solvate will be capable of isolation, for example when one or more solvent molecules are incorporated in the crystal lattice of the crystalline solid. 'Solvate' encompasses both solution-phase and isolable solvates. Representative solvates include hydrates, ethanolates and methanolates.
[00118] 'Subject' includes humans. The terms 'human', 'patient' and 'subject' are used interchangeably herein.
[00119] 'Therapeutically effective amount' means the amount of a compound that, when administered to a subject for treating a disease, is sufficient to effect such treatment for the disease. The "therapeutically effective amount" can vary depending on the compound, the disease and its severity, and the age, weight, etc., of the subject to be treated.
[00120] 'Preventing' or 'prevention' refers to a reduction in risk of acquiring or developing a disease or disorder (i.e., causing at least one of the clinical symptoms of the disease not to develop in a subject that may be exposed to a disease-causing agent, or predisposed to the disease in advance of disease onset.
[00121] The term 'prophylaxis' is related to 'prevention', and refers to a measure or procedure the purpose of which is to prevent, rather than to treat or cure a disease. Non-limiting examples of prophylactic measures may include the administration of vaccines; the administration of low molecular weight heparin to hospital patients at risk for thrombosis due, for example, to immobilization; and the administration of an anti-malarial agent such as chloroquine, in advance of a visit to a geographical region where malaria is endemic or the risk of contracting malaria is high.
[00122] 'Treating' or 'treatment' of any disease or disorder refers, in one embodiment, to ameliorating the disease or disorder (i.e., arresting the disease or reducing the manifestation, extent or severity of at least one of the clinical symptoms thereof). In another embodiment 'treating' or 'treatment' refers to ameliorating at least one physical parameter, which may not be discernible by the subject. In yet another embodiment, 'treating' or 'treatment' refers to modulating the disease or disorder, either physically, (e.g., stabilization of a discernible symptom), physiologically, (e.g., stabilization of a physical parameter), or both. In a further embodiment, "treating" or "treatment" relates to slowing the progression of the disease.
[00123] As used herein, the term 'cancer' refers to a malignant or benign growth of cells in skin or in body organs, for example but without limitation, breast, prostate, lung, kidney, pancreas, stomach or bowel. A cancer tends to infiltrate into adjacent tissue and spread (metastasise) to distant organs, for example to bone, liver, lung or the brain. As used herein the term cancer includes both metastatic rumour cell types, such as but not limited to, melanoma, lymphoma, leukaemia, fibrosarcoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, and mastocytoma and types of tissue carcinoma, such as but not limited to, colorectal cancer, prostate cancer, small cell lung cancer and non-small cell lung cancer, breast cancer, pancreatic cancer, bladder cancer, renal cancer, gastric cancer, glioblastoma, primary liver cancer, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer and uterine leiomyosarcoma.
[00124] As used herein the term leukaemia refers to neoplastic diseases of the blood and blood forming organs. Such diseases can cause bone marrow and immune system dysfunction, which renders the host highly susceptible to infection and bleeding.
[00125] 'Compounds of the present invention', and equivalent expressions, are meant to embrace compounds of the Formula(e) as hereinbefore described, which expression includes the prodrugs, the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, and the solvates, e.g., hydrates, where the context so permits. Similarly, reference to intermediates, whether or not they themselves are claimed, is meant to embrace their salts, and solvates, where the context so permits.
[00126] When ranges are referred to herein, for example but without limitation, Ci-Cg alkyl, the citation of a range should be considered a representation of each member of said range. [00127] Other derivatives of the compounds of this invention have activity in both their acid and acid derivative forms, but in the acid sensitive form often offers advantages of solubility, tissue compatibility, or delayed release in the mammalian organism (see, Bundgard, H., Design of Prodrugs, pp. 7-9, 21-24, Elsevier, Amsterdam 1985). Prodrugs include acid derivatives well know to practitioners of the art, such as, for example, esters prepared by reaction of the parent acid with a suitable alcohol, or amides prepared by reaction of the parent acid compound with a substituted or unsubstituted amine, or
acid anhydrides, or mixed anhydrides. Simple aliphatic or aromatic esters, amides and anhydrides derived from acidic groups pendant on the compounds of this invention are particularly useful prodrugs. In some cases it is desirable to prepare double ester type prodrugs such as (acyloxy)alkyl esters or ((alkoxycarbonyl)oxy)alkylesters. Particular such prodrugs are the Ci to C8 alkyl, C2-C8 alkenyl, aryl, C7- Ci2 substituted aryl, and C7-C12 arylalkyl esters of the compounds of the invention.
[00128] As used herein, the term 'isotopic variant' refers to a compound that contains unnatural proportions of isotopes at one or more of the atoms that constitute such compound. For example, an 'isotopic variant' of a compound can contain one or more non-radioactive isotopes, such as for example, deuterium (2H or D), carbon- 13 (13C), nitrogen- 15 (15N), or the like. It will be understood that, in a compound where such isotopic substitution is made, the following atoms, where present, may vary, so that for example, any hydrogen may be 2HIO, any carbon may be 13C, or any nitrogen may be 15N, and that the presence and placement of such atoms may be determined within the skill of the art. Likewise, the invention may include the preparation of isotopic variants with radioisotopes, in the instance for example, where the resulting compounds may be used for drug and/or substrate tissue distribution studies. The radioactive isotopes tritium, i.e. 3H, and carbon- 14, i.e. 14C, are particularly useful for this purpose in view of their ease of incorporation and ready means of detection. Further, compounds may be prepared that are substituted with positron emitting isotopes, such as 11C, 18F, 15O and 13N, and would be useful in Positron Emission Topography (PET) studies for examining substrate receptor occupancy. [00129] All isotopic variants of the compounds provided herein, radioactive or not, are intended to be encompassed within the scope of the invention.
[00130] It is also to be understood that compounds that have the same molecular formula but differ in the nature or sequence of bonding of their atoms or the arrangement of their atoms in space are termed 'isomers'. Isomers that differ in the arrangement of their atoms in space are termed 'stereoisomers'.
[00131] Stereoisomers that are not mirror images of one another are termed 'diastereomers' and those that are non-superimposable mirror images of each other are termed 'enantiomers'. When a compound has an asymmetric center, for example, it is bonded to four different groups, a pair of enantiomers is possible. An enantiomer can be characterized by the absolute configuration of its asymmetric center and is described by the R- and S-sequencing rules of Cahn and Prelog, or by the manner in which the molecule rotates the plane of polarized light and designated as dextrorotatory or levorotatory (i.e., as (+) or (-)-isomers respectively). A chiral compound can exist as either individual enantiomer or as a mixture thereof. A mixture containing equal proportions of the enantiomers is called a 'racemic mixture'.
[00132] 'Tautomers' refer to compounds that are interchangeable forms of a particular compound structure, and that vary in the displacement of hydrogen atoms and electrons. Thus, two structures may be in equilibrium through the movement of π electrons and an atom (usually H). For example, enols and ketones are tautomers because they are rapidly interconverted by treatment with either acid or base. Another example of tautomerism is the aci- and nitro- forms of phenylnitromethane, that are likewise formed by treatment with acid or base.
[00133] Tautomeric forms may be relevant to the attainment of the optimal chemical reactivity and biological activity of a compound of interest.
[00134] The compounds of this invention may possess one or more asymmetric centers; such compounds can therefore be produced as individual (R)- or (S)- stereoisomers or as mixtures thereof. [00135] Unless indicated otherwise, the description or naming of a particular compound in the specification and claims is intended to include both individual enantiomers and mixtures, racemic or otherwise, thereof. The methods for the determination of stereochemistry and the separation of stereoisomers are well-known in the art.
THE COMPOUNDS
[00136] The compounds of the present invention may be described generally as pyrazolo[4,3- d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-ones substituted in the 5-position.
[00137] Accordingly, the present invention relates to compounds having anti-inflammatory properties, according to formula (I):
I wherein:
CyI is substituted or unsubstituted aryl or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl; R1 is H, substituted or unsubstituted alky;
R is H, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkylalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl;
R4 is alkyl substituted with halo, alkoxy, aryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl; and ml is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4; provided that when CyI is heterocycloalkyl and the heterocycloalkyl group is joined to -(CH2)ml- via a N atom of heterocycloalkyl group then ml is 2, 3 or 4; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate or prodrug thereof or isotopic variants thereof, stereoisomers or tautomers thereof.
[00138] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula I, the compound is according to formulae Ia or Ib:
Ia Ib wherein R1, R2, R4 and ml are as described for formula I;
Ar is substituted or unsubstituted aryl; and HetAr is substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl.
[00139] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae Ia-Ib, R1 is alkyl. In another embodiment R1 is Me, Et or i-Pr. In another embodiment R1 is Me.
[00140] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae Ia-Ib, ml is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4. In another embodiment ml is 1, 2 or 3. In yet another embodiment ml is 1.
[00141] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae Ia-Ib, the compound is according to formula Ia.
[00142] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula I, the compound is according to formulae Ha, lib, or Hc:
Nc wherein:
Ar is substituted or unsubstituted phenyl; and
R2 and R4 are as described for formula I.
[00143] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae Ha, lib or Hc, Ar is phenyl unsubstituted or substituted with one or more groups selected from alkyl, halo, haloalkyl, and alkoxy. [00144] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae Ha, lib or Hc, Ar is phenyl substituted with cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl.
[00145] In another embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae Ha -Hc, Ar is phenyl substituted with piperidinyl, piperazinyl, and morpholinyl.
[00146] In another embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae Ha -Hc, Ar is phenyl substituted with pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, isoxazolyl, and oxazolyl. [00147] In another embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae Ha -Hc, Ar is phenyl substituted with pyridyl, and pyrimidinyl.
[00148] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula I, the compound is according to formulae Ilia or IHb:
Ilia 1Mb wherein:
R2 and R4 are as described for formula I; and each of R3b and R3c is independently H, alkyl, halo, haloalkyl, or alkoxy.
[00149] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae IHa-IIIb, one of R3b and R3c is Me, F, Cl, CF3, OMe, or OEt and the other is H.
[00150] In another embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae IHa-IIIb, both R3b and R3c are independently F, Cl, OMe, CF3, or OEt.
[00151] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae IHa-IIIb, both R3b and R3c are independently F, Cl, OMe, CF3, or OEt. In another embodiment, both R3b and R3c are Cl. In another embodiment, both R3b and R3c are F. In another embodiment, both R3b and R3c are OMe. In another embodiment, both R3b and R3c are CF3.
[00152] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae IHa-IIIb, both R c is H.
[00153] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula I, the compound is according to formulae IVa or IVb:
IVa IVb wherein:
R2 and R4 are as described for formula I; and
R3b is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, heterocycloalkyl or heteroaryl.
[0100] In another embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae IVa-IVb, R , 33bD . is selected from substituted or unsubstituted piperidinyl, piperazinyl, and morpholinyl.
[0101] In another embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae IVa-IVb, R3b is selected from substituted or unsubstituted pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, and oxazolyl.
[0102] In another embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae IVa-IVb, R3b is selected from substituted or unsubstituted pyridyl, and pyrimidinyl.
[0103] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula I, the compound is according to formulae Va, Vb, Vc, Vd, Ve, Vf, Vg, and Vh:
Va Vb Vc
Vd Vf
Ve
Vh
Vg wherein R2 and R4 are as described for formula I.
[0104] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae I-Vh, R4 is alkyl substituted with halo, alkoxy, aryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl. [0105] In another embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae I-Vh, R4 is alkyl substituted with halo or alkoxy.
[[00110066]] IInn aannootthheerr eemmbboc diment, with respect to compounds of formulae I-Vh, R4 is alkyl substituted with Cl, F, OMe, or O-i-Pr.
[[00110077]] IIni another embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae I-Vh, R4 is 4,4,4- trifluoro-n-butyl.
[[00110088]] IIni another embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae I-Vh, R4 is 3-methoxy-n- propyl, or 3-isopropoxy-n-propyl.
[0109] In another embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae I-Vh, R4 is alkyl substituted with cycloalkyl.
[0110] In another embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae I-Vh, R4 is alkyl substituted with cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl or cyclohexyl.
[0111] In another embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae I-Vh, R4 is cyclopropylmethyl, cyclopentylmethyl or cyclohexylmethyl.
[0112] In another embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae I-Vh, R4 is alkyl substituted with heterocycloalkyl.
[0113] In another embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae I-Vh, R4 is alkyl substituted with piperidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydropyranyl, or morpholinyl.
[0114] In another embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae I-Vh, R4 is 2-(morpholin- l-yl)ethyl, 3-(morpholin-l-yl)propyl, 2-(tetrahydropyran-4-yl)ethyl, or (tetrahydrofuran-2-yl)methyl.
[0115] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula I, the compound is according to formulae Via, VIb, VIc, VId, VIe, VIf, VIg, and VIh:
wherein R2 is as described for formula I.
[0116] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae Ia-Ib, the compound is according to formula Ib.
[0117] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula I, the compound is according to formulae Vila, VIIb or VIIc:
VIIc wherein:
HetAr is substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl;
R2 and R4 are as described for formula I.
[0118] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae VIIa-VIIc, HetAr is pyridyl unsubstituted or substituted with one or more groups selected from alkyl, halo, haloalkyl, and alkoxy. [0119] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae VIIa-VIIc, HetAr is pyridyl substituted with cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl.
[0120] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula Ib, the compound is according to formula Villa or VIIIb:
R2 and R4 are as described for formula I; and each of R3b and R3c is independently H, alkyl, halo, haloalkyl, or alkoxy.
[0121] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae VIIIa-VIIIb, one of R3b and R , 33Cc is Me, F, Cl, CF3, OMe, or OEt and the other is H. [0122] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae VIIIa-VIIIb, both R3b and R3c are independently F, Cl, OMe, CF3, or OEt.
[0123] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula I, the compound is according to formulae IX or IXb:
IXa IXb wherein:
R2 and R4 are as described for formula I; and
R3b is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, heterocycloalkyl or heteroaryl.
[0124] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae IXa-IXb, R , 33bD is selected from substituted or unsubstituted piperidinyl, piperazinyl, and morpholinyl.
[0125] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae IXa-IXb, R3b is selected from substituted or unsubstituted pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, and oxazolyl.
[0126] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae IXa-IXb, R3b is selected from substituted or unsubstituted pyridyl, and pyrimidinyl.
[0127] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula I, the compound is according to formula Xa, Xb, Xc, Xd, Xe, Xf, Xg, and Xh:
IXb IXc
IXd IXf
IXh
IXg
wherein R2 and R4 are as described for formula I. In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula I, the compound is accordingla XIa, XIb, XIc, XId, XIe, XIf, XIg, and XIh:
XIb XIc
XId XIf
XIh
XIg
wherein R and R are as described for formula I.
[0129] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae VIIa-VIIc, HetAr is selected from substituted or unsubstituted pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, isoxazolyl, and oxazolyl.
[0130] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae VIIa-VIIc, HetAr is selected from pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, isoxazolyl, and oxazolyl; substituted with one or more groups selected from Ci-Ce alkyl, halo, haloalkyl, and phenyl. In one embodiment, the
HetAr is mono substituted and the substitution is selected from Ph, Me, CF3, and halo. In another embodiment, the HetAr is di substituted and the substitution is selected from Ph, Me and CF3
[0131] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula I, the compound is according to formulae XIIa, XIIb, XIIc, XIId, and XIIe:
XIIe
XlId wherein R2 and R4 are as described for formula I; and R3d is H, alkyl or haloalkyl.
[0132] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae XIIa-XIIe, R is Me.
[0133] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae VIIa-XIIe, R4 is alkyl substituted with halo, alkoxy, aryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl.
[0134] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae VIIa-XIIe, R4 is alkyl substituted with halo or alkoxy.
[0135] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae VIIa-XIIe, R4 is alkyl substituted with Cl, F, OMe, or O-i-Pr.
[0136] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae VIIa-XIIe, R4 is 4,4,4- trifluoro-n-butyl.
[0137] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae VIIa-XIIe, R4 is 3-methoxy- n-propyl, or 3-isopropoxy-n-propyl.
[0138] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae VIIa-XIIe, R4 is alkyl substituted with cycloalkyl.
[0139] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae VIIa-XIIe, R4 is alkyl substituted with cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl or cyclohexyl.
[0140] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae VIIa-XIIe, R4 is cyclopropylmethyl, cyclopentylmethyl or cyclohexylmethyl.
[0141] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae VIIa-XIIe, R4 is alkyl substituted with heterocycloalkyl.
[0142] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae VIIa-XIIe, R4 is alkyl substituted with piperidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydropyranyl, or morpholinyl.
[0143] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae VIIa-XIIe, R4 is 2-
(morpholin-l-yl)ethyl, 3-(morpholin-l-yl)propyl, 2-(tetrahydropyran-4-yl)ethyl, or (tetrahydrofuran-2- yl)methyl.
[0144] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula I, the compound is according to formulae XIIIa, XIIIb, XIIIc, XIIId, and XIIIe:
[0145] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae Ia-XIIIe, R2 is Me, Et, n-Pr, t-Bu, cyclopropyl, cyclohexyl, or cyclopentyl.
[0146] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae Ia-XIIIe, R2 is phenyl or substituted phenyl.
[0147] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae Ia-XIIIe, R2 is pyridyl.
[0148] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae Ia-XIIIe, R is alkyl or cycloalkyl. In another embodiment R2 is alkyl.
[0149] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula I, the compound is selected from Table 1 ; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate or prodrug thereof or isotopic variants thereof, stereoisomers or tautomers thereof.
[0150] In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula I, the compound is selected from:
5-(benzyl(3,4-dichlorobenzyl)amino)-l-methyl-3-propyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)- one;
5-((cyclohexylmethyl)(3,4-dichlorobenzyl)amino)- 1 -methyl-3 -propyl- lH-pyrazolo[4,3- d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
5-((cyclohexylmethyl)((2-morpholinopyridin-4-yl)methyl)amino)- 1 -methyl- 3 -propyl- 1 H- pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
5-((4-methoxybenzyl)(3-morpholinopropyl)amino)-l-methyl-3-propyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3- d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
5-((4-fluorobenzyl)(3-morpholinopropyl)amino)-l-methyl-3-propyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3- d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
5-((cyclohexylmethyl)(3-(4-methylpiperazin- 1 -yl)benzyl)amino)- 1 -methyl-3 -propyl- IH- pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
5-(( 1 H-pyrazol- 1 -yl)benzyl)(cyclohexylmethyl)amino)- 1 -methyl-3 -propyl- 1 H-pyrazolo [4,3 - d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
5-((lH-pyrrol-l-yl)benzyl)(cyclohexylmethyl)amino)-l-methyl-3-propyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3- d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
5-((cyclohexylmethyl)(methyl- lH-pyrazol-3-yl)benzyl)amino)- 1 -methyl- 3 -propyl- IH- pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
5-((lH-l,2,4-triazol-l-yl)benzyl)(cyclohexylmethyl)amino)-l-methyl-3-propyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3- d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
5-((3,4-dichlorobenzyl)(4,4,4-trifluorobutyl)amino)-l-methyl-3-propyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3- d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
5-((cyclohexylmethyl)((4-methyl-2-phenylthiazol-5-yl)methyl)amino)- 1 -methyl-3 -propyl- IH- pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
5-((cyclohexylmethyl)(3 -morpholinobenzyl)amino)- 1 -methyl-3 -propyl- 1 H-pyrazolo [4,3 - d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
5-((cyclopentylmethyl)(3-morpholinobenzyl)amino)-l-methyl-3-propyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3- d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
5-((bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptan-2-ylmethyl)(3-morpholinobenzyl)amino)- 1 -methyl-3 -propyl- IH- pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one; l-methyl-5-((3-morpholinobenzyl)(2-(tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl)ethyl)amino)-3-propyl-lH- pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
1 -methyl-5-((3 -morpholinobenzyl)(3 -phenylpropyl)amino)-3 -propyl- 1 H-pyrazolo [4,3 - d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
5-((4-fluorobenzyl)((tetrahydrofuran-2-yl)methyl)amino)-l-methyl-3-propyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3- d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
5-((cyclohexylmethyl)((l-methyl-3-phenyl-lH-pyrazol-5-yl)methyl)amino)-l-methyl-3-propyl- lH-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
5-((bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptan-2-ylmethyl)((4-methyl-2-phenylthiazol-5-yl)methyl)amino)- 1 -methyl-3- propyl-1 H-pyrazolo [4,3 -d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one; l-methyl-5-(((4-methyl-2-phenylthiazol-5-yl)methyl)(3-phenylpropyl)amino)-3-propyl-lH- pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
5-((4-chlorophenethyl)(cyclohexylmethyl)amino)-l-methyl-3-propyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3- d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
5-((4-chlorophenethyl)(2-(tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl)ethyl)amino)-l-methyl-3-propyl-lH- pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
5-((cyclopentylmethyl)((4-methyl-2-phenylthiazol-5-yl)methyl)amino)-l-methyl-3-propyl-lH- pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
5-((4-fluorobenzyl)(3-isopropoxypropyl)amino)-l-methyl-3-propyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-
7(6H)-one;
3-tert-butyl-5-((cyclohexylmethyl)((2-morpholinopyridin-4-yl)methyl)amino)-l -methyl- IH- pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
3-tert-butyl-5-((4-fluorobenzyl)(3-morpholinopropyl)amino)-l -methyl- lH-pyrazolo[4,3- d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
3-tert-butyl-5-((cyclohexylmethyl)(4-fluorobenzyl)amino)-l -methyl- lH-pyrazolo[4,3- d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
3-tert-butyl-5-((4-fluorobenzyl)(3-isopropoxypropyl)amino)-l -methyl- lH-pyrazolo[4,3- d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
5-((cyclohexylmethyl)(4-fluorobenzyl)amino)-3-propyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
5-((cyclohexylmethyl)(3-morpholinobenzyl)amino)-l-ethyl-3-propyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3- d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
5-((cyclohexylmethyl)((2-morpholinopyridin-4-yl)methyl)amino)-3-cyclopentyl-l -methyl- IH- pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
3 -tert-butyl-5-((cyclohexylmethyl)(3 -morpholinobenzyl)amino)- 1 -methyl- 1 H-pyrazolo [4,3 - d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
5-((cyclohexylmethyl)(3-morpholinobenzyl)amino)-3-propyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-
7(6H)-one;
5-(( 1 H- 1 ,2,4-triazol- 1 -yl)benzyl)(cyclohexylmethyl)amino)-3-tert-butyl- 1 -methyl- IH- pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
5-((cyclohexylmethyl)(4-fluorobenzyl)amino)-l-isopropyl-3-propyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3- d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
5-((cyclohexylmethyl)(3-(4-methylpiperazin- 1 -yl)benzyl)amino)- 1 -isopropyl-3-propyl- IH- pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
5-(( 1 H-pyrazol- 1 -yl)benzyl)(cyclopropylmethyl)amino)-3 -tert-butyl- 1 -methyl- 1 H-pyrazolo [4,3 - d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
3-tert-butyl-5-((4-fluorobenzyl)(2-morpholinoethyl)amino)- 1 -methyl- lH-pyrazolo[4,3- d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
5-((2,2-dimethyl-3-morpholinopropyl)(4-fluorobenzyl)amino)-l-methyl-3-propyl-lH- pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
5-(( 1 H- 1 ,2,4-triazol- 1 -yl)benzyl)(2-morpholinoethyl)amino)-3-tert-butyl- 1 -methyl- 1 H- pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
5-(( IH-1 ,2,4-triazol- 1 -yl)benzyl)(cyclohexylmethyl)amino)-3-tert-butyl- 1 -ethyl- 1 H-pyrazolo [4,3- d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
3-tert-butyl- 1 -methyl-5-((3-(4-methylpiperazin- 1 -yl)benzyl)(2-morpholinoethyl)amino)- 1 H- pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
3 -tert-butyl-5-((cyclohexylmethyl)(3 -morpholinobenzyl)amino)- 1 -ethyl- 1 H-pyrazolo [4,3 - d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one;
5-((4-fluorobenzyl)(3-morpholinopropyl)amino)-l-methyl-3-(pyridin-3-yl)-lH-pyrazolo[4,3- d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one; and
5-((4-fluorobenzyl)(3-morpholinopropyl)amino)-3-(3-hydroxyphenyl)-l -methyl- 1 H-pyrazolo [4,3- d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate or prodrug thereof or isotopic variants thereof, stereoisomers or tautomers thereof.
[0151] In yet another embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae Ia-Ib, the compound is selected from all compounds of the invention exemplified specifically herein. [0152] A compound for use according to the invention may contain one or more asymmetric carbon atoms and may exist in racemic and optically active forms. It will be understood by a person of skill in the art that the present invention includes both the racemic mixture and each enantiomer in isolated form. A compound according to an embodiment of the invention may be in trans or cis form. [0153] The present invention also extends to a prodrug of a compound according to an embodiment of the invention such as an ester or amide thereof. A prodrug is a compound that may be converted under physiological conditions or by solvolysis to a compound according to an embodiment of the invention or to a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of a compound according to an embodiment of the invention. A prodrug may be inactive when administered to a subject but is converted in vivo to an active compound of the invention. 'Pharmaceutically acceptable prodrugs' as used herein refers to those prodrugs of the compounds useful in the present invention, which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of patients with undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio, and effective for their intended use of the compounds of the invention. The term 'prodrug' means a compound that is transformed in vivo to yield an effective compound useful in the present invention or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate or solvate thereof. The transformation may occur by various mechanisms, such as through hydrolysis in blood. The compounds bearing metabolically cleavable groups have the advantage that they may exhibit improved bioavailability as a result of enhanced solubility and/or rate of absorption conferred upon the parent compound by virtue of the presence of the metabolically cleavable group, thus, such compounds act as prodrugs. A thorough discussion is provided in Design of Prodrugs, H. Bundgard, ed., Elsevier (1985); Methods in Enzymology; K. Widder et al, Ed., Academic Press, 42, 309-396 (1985); A Textbook of Drug Design and Development, Krogsgaard-Larsen and H. Bundgard, ed., Chapter 5; "Design and Applications of Prodrugs" 113-191 (1991); Advanced Drug Delivery Reviews, H. Bundgard, 8, 1-38, (1992); J. Pharm. Sci., 77,285 (1988); Chem. Pharm. Bull., N. Nakeya et al, 32, 692 (1984); Pro-drugs as Novel Delivery Systems, T. Higuchi and V. Stella, 14 A.C.S. Symposium Series, and Bioreversible Carriers in Drug Design, E.B. Roche, ed., American Pharmaceutical Association and Pergamon Press, 1987, all of which are incorporated herein by reference.
PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS
[0154] Compounds of the invention can be incorporated into pharmaceutical compositions suitable for administration. Such compositions typically comprise at least one compound of the invention and at least one pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. As used herein the language 'pharmaceutically acceptable carrier' is intended to include solid carriers such as lactose, magnesium stearate, terra alba, sucrose, talc, stearic acid, gelatin, agar, pectin, acacia or the like; and liquids such as vegetable oils, arachis oil and sterile water, or the like, any and all solvents, dispersion media, coatings, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic and absorption delaying agents, and the like, compatible with pharmaceutical administration. This listing of pharmaceutically acceptable carriers is not to be construed as limiting. The use of such media and agents for pharmaceutically active substances is well known in the art. Except insofar as any conventional media or agent is incompatible with the active compound, use thereof in the compositions is contemplated. Supplementary active compounds can also be incorporated into the compositions.
[0155] A pharmaceutical composition of the invention is formulated to be compatible with its intended route of administration. Examples of routes of administration include parenteral, e.g., intravenous, intradermal, subcutaneous, oral (e.g., inhalation), transdermal (topical), transmucosal, and rectal administration. Solutions or suspensions used for parenteral, intradermal, or subcutaneous application can include the following components: a sterile diluent such as water for injection, saline solution, fixed oils, polyethylene glycols, glycerine, propylene glycol or other synthetic solvents; antibacterial agents such as benzyl alcohol or methyl parabens; antioxidants such as ascorbic acid or sodium bisulfite; chelating agents such as ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid; buffers such as acetates, citrates or phosphates and agents for the adjustment of tonicity such as sodium chloride or dextrose. The pH can be adjusted with acids or bases, such as hydrochloric acid or sodium hydroxide. The parenteral preparation can be enclosed in ampoules, disposable syringes or multiple dose vials made of glass or plastic.
[0156] Pharmaceutical compositions suitable for injectable use include sterile aqueous solutions
(where water soluble) or dispersions and sterile powders for the extemporaneous preparation of sterile injectable solutions or dispersion. For intravenous administration, suitable carriers include physiological saline, bacteriostatic water, Cremophor ELTM (BASF, Parsippany, NJ) or phosphate buffered saline (PBS). In all cases, the composition must be sterile and should be fluid to the extent that easy syringability exists. It must be stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage and must be preserved against the contaminating action of microorganisms such as bacteria and fungi. The carrier can be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (for example, glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyetheylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof. The proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of a coating such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersion and by the use of surfactants. Prevention of the action of microorganisms can be achieved by various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, parabens, 'chlorobutanol, phenol, ascorbic acid, thimerosal, and the like. In particular cases it is possible to include
istonic agents, for example, sugars, polyalcohols such as manitol, sorbitol, sodium chloride in the composition. Prolonged absorption of the injectable compositions can be brought about by including in the composition an agent which delays absorption, for example, aluminum mono stearate and gelatin. [0157] Sterile injectable solutions can be prepared by incorporating the active compound (e.g., a compound according to an embodiment of the invention) in the required amount in an appropriate solvent with one or a combination of ingredients enumerated above, as required, followed by filtered sterilization. Generally, dispersions are prepared by incorporating the active compound into a sterile vehicle which contains a basic dispersion medium and the required other ingredients from those enumerated above. In the case of sterile powders for the preparation of sterile injectable solutions, the particular methods of preparation are vacuum drying and freeze-drying which yields a powder of the active ingredient plus any additional desired ingredient from a previously sterile-filtered solution thereof.
[0158] Oral compositions generally include an inert diluent or an edible carrier. They can be enclosed in gelatin capsules or compressed into tablets. For the purpose of oral therapeutic administration, the active compound can be incorporated with excipients and used in the form of tablets, troches, or capsules. Oral compositions can also be prepared using a fluid carrier for use as a mouthwash, wherein the compound in the fluid carrier is applied orally and swished and expectorated or swallowed. [0159] Pharmaceutically compatible binding agents, and/or adjuvant materials can be included as part of the composition. The tablets, pills, capsules, troches and the like can contain any of the following ingredients, or compounds of a similar nature: a binder such as microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth or gelatin; an excipient such as starch or lactose, a disintegrating agent such as alginic acid, Primogel, or corn starch; a lubricant such as magnesium stearate or Sterotes; a glidant such as colloidal silicon dioxide; a sweetening agent such as sucrose or saccharin; or a flavoring agent such as peppermint, methyl salicylate, or orange flavoring.
[0160] For administration by inhalation, the compounds are delivered in the form of an aerosol spray from pressured container or dispenser which contains a suitable propellant, e.g., a gas such as carbon dioxide, or a nebulizer.
[0161] Systemic administration can also be by transmucosal or transdermal means. For transmucosal or transdermal administration, penetrants appropriate to the barrier to be permeated are used in the formulation. Such penetrants are generally known in the art, and include, for example, for transmucosal administration, detergents, bile salts, and fusidic acid derivatives. Transmucosal administration can be accomplished through the use of nasal sprays or suppositories. For transdermal administration, the active compounds are formulated into ointments, salves, gels, or creams as generally known in the art.
[0162] The compounds can also be prepared in the form of suppositories (e.g., with conventional suppository bases such as cocoa butter and other glycerides) or retention enemas for rectal delivery. [0163] In one embodiment, the active compounds are prepared with carriers that will protect the compound against rapid elimination from the body, such as a controlled release formulation, including implants and microencapsulated delivery systems. Biodegradable, biocompatible polymers can be used, such as ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, collagen, polyorthoesters, and polylactic
acid. Methods for preparation of such formulations will be apparent to those skilled in the art. The materials can also be obtained commercially from Alza Corporation and Nova Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Liposomal suspensions (including liposomes targeted to infected cells with monoclonal antibodies to viral antigens) can also be used as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. These can be prepared according to methods known to those skilled in the art.
[0164] It is especially advantageous to formulate oral or parenteral compositions in dosage unit form for ease of administration and uniformity of dosage. Dosage unit form as used herein refers to physically discrete units suited as unitary dosages for the subject to be treated; each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active compound calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier. The specification for the dosage unit forms of the invention are dictated by and directly dependent on the unique characteristics of the active compound and the particular therapeutic effect to be achieved, and the limitations inherent in the art of compounding such an active compound for the treatment of individuals.
[0165] The pharmaceutical compositions can be included in a container, pack, or dispenser together with instructions for administration.
[0166] A compound according to an embodiment of the invention may be provided as a salt, particularly as a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of compounds of formula I, formulae Ia-Ib, or any of the formulae herein described. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable salts of these compounds include those derived from organic acids such as acetic acid, malic acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, lactic acid, oxalic acid, succinic acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, benzoic acid, salicylic acid, phenylacetic acid, mandelic acid, methanesulphonic acid, benzenesulphonic acid and/>-toluenesulphonic acid, mineral acids such as hydrochloric and sulphuric acid and the like, giving methanesulphonate, benzenesulphonate, p- toluenesulphonate, hydrochloride and sulphate, and the like, respectively or those derived from bases such as organic and inorganic bases. Examples of suitable inorganic bases for the formation of salts of compounds for this invention include the hydroxides, carbonates, and bicarbonates of ammonia, lithium, sodium, calcium, potassium, aluminium, iron, magnesium, zinc and the like. Salts can also be formed with suitable organic bases. Such bases suitable for the formation of pharmaceutically acceptable base addition salts with compounds of the present invention include organic bases which are nontoxic and strong enough to form salts. Such organic bases are already well known in the art and may include amino acids such as arginine and lysine, mono-, di-, or trihydroxyalkylamines such as mono-, di-, and triethanolamine, choline, mono-, di-, and trialkylamines, such as methylamine, dimethylamine, and trimethylamine, guanidine; N-methylglucosamine; N-methylpiperazine; morpholine; ethylenediamine; N- benzylphenethylamine; tris(hydroxymethyl) aminomethane; and the like.
[0167] Salts of compounds according to an embodiment of the invention may be prepared in a conventional manner using methods well known in the art. Acid addition salts of said basic compounds may be prepared by dissolving the free base compounds according to the first or second aspects of the invention in aqueous or aqueous alcohol solution or other suitable solvents containing the required acid. Where a compound of the invention contains an acidic function, a base salt of said compound may be prepared by reacting said compound with a suitable base. The acid or base salt may separate directly or
can be obtained by concentrating the solution e.g. by evaporation. The compounds of this invention may also exist in solvated or hydrated forms.
[0168] The following formulation examples illustrate representative pharmaceutical compositions of this invention. The present invention, however, is not limited to the following pharmaceutical compositions.
Formulation 1 - Tablets
[0169] A compound of the invention is admixed as a dry powder with a dry gelatin binder in an approximate 1:2 weight ratio. A minor amount of magnesium stearate is added as a lubricant. The mixture is formed into 240-270 mg tablets (80-90 mg of active amide compound per tablet) in a tablet press.
Formulation 2 - Capsules
[0170] A compound of the invention is admixed as a dry powder with a starch diluent in an approximate 1 : 1 weight ratio. The mixture is filled into 250 mg capsules (125 mg of active amide compound per capsule).
Formulation 3 - Liquid
[0171] A compound of the invention (125 mg), sucrose (1.75 g) and xanthan gum (4 mg) are blended, passed through a No. 10 mesh U.S. sieve, and then mixed with a previously made solution of microcrystalline cellulose and sodium carboxymethyl cellulose (11 :89, 50 mg) in water. Sodium benzoate (10 mg), flavor, and color are diluted with water and added with stirring. Sufficient water is then added to produce a total volume of 5 mL.
Formulation 4 - Tablets
[0172] A compound of the invention is admixed as a dry powder with a dry gelatin binder in an approximate 1:2 weight ratio. A minor amount of magnesium stearate is added as a lubricant. The mixture is formed into 450-900 mg tablets (150-300 mg of active amide compound) in a tablet press.
Formulation 5 - Injection
[0173] A compound of the invention is dissolved or suspended in a buffered sterile saline injectable aqueous medium to a concentration of approximately 5 mg/mL.
Formulation 6 - Topical
[0174] Stearyl alcohol (250 g) and a white petrolatum (250 g) are melted at about 75°C and then a mixture of a compound of the invention (50 g) methylparaben (0.25 g), propylparaben (0.15 g), sodium lauryl sulfate (10 g), and propylene glycol (120 g) dissolved in water (about 370 g) is added and the resulting mixture is stirred until it congeals.
METHODS OF TREATMENT
[0175] The present invention relates also to a method of treatment or prevention of osteoarthritis, which comprises administering to a subject in need thereof, a therapeutically effective amount of compound of the invention.
[0176] The present invention relates also to a method of treatment or prevention of osteoarthritis, which comprises administering to a subject in need thereof, a therapeutically effective amount of an inhibitor of PDElA according to any of the formulae herein described.
[0177] The present invention relates also to a method of treatment or prevention of osteoarthritis, which comprises administering to a subject in need thereof, a therapeutically effective amount of an inhibitor of PDElA according to formulae Ia-Ib.
[0178] Another aspect of the present method invention relates to a method of treatment or prophylaxis of a condition characterized by abnormal PDElA activity, which comprises administering a therapeutically effective amount of a PDElA inhibiting compound according to formula I, formulae Ia-Ib, or any of the formulae herein described.
[0179] A further aspect of the present method invention is a method of treatment or prophylaxis of a disease involving degradation of cartilage, which comprises administering a therapeutically effective a compound according to formula I, formulae Ia-Ib or any of the formulae herein decribed. [0180] A special embodiment of the present method invention is a method of treatment or prevention of OA, which comprises administering to a subject in need thereof, a therapeutically effective amount of a compound according to formula I, formulae Ia-Ib or any of the formulae herein described. [0181] This invention also relates to the use of the present compounds in the manufacture of a medicament for treatment or prophylaxis of a condition prevented, ameliorated or eliminated by administration of an inhibitor of PDElA which is a compound of the invention, or a condition selected from diseases involving inflammation, most particularly for the treatment of diseases selected from osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis and osteoporosis.
[0182] Administration of the compound of the present invention to the subject patient includes both self-administration and administration by another person. The patient may be in need of treatment for an existing disease or medical condition, or may desire prophylactic treatment to prevent or reduce the risk for diseases and medical conditions affected by a disturbance in bone metabolism. The compound of the present invention may be delivered to the subject patient orally, transdermally, via inhalation, injection, nasally, rectally or via a sustained release formulation.
[0183] A particular regimen of the present method comprises the administration to a subject in suffering from a disease condition characterized by a disturbance in bone and/or cartilage metabolism, of an effective PDEIA-inhibiting amount of a compound of the present invention for a period of time sufficient to reduce the abnormal levels of bone and/or cartilage degradation in the patient, and in particular terminate, the self-perpetuating processes responsible for said degradation. A special embodiment of the method comprises administering of an effective PDElA inhibiting amount of a compound of the present invention to a subject patient suffering from or susceptible to the development of osteoarthritis, for a period of time sufficient to reduce or prevent, respectively, collagen and bone degradation in the joints of said patient, and in particular terminate, the self-perpetuating processes responsible for said degradation.
[0184] Toxicity and therapeutic efficacy of such compounds can be determined by standard pharmaceutical procedures in cell cultures or experimental animals, e.g., for determining the LD50 (the dose lethal to 50% of the population) and the ED50 (the dose therapeutically effective in 50% of the population). The dose ratio between toxic and therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index and it can be expressed as the ratio LD50ZED50. Particular compounds are those that exhibit large therapeutic indices.
While compounds that exhibit toxic side effects may be used, care should be taken to design a delivery system that targets such compounds to the site of affected tissue in order to minimize potential damage to uninfected cells and, thereby, reduce side effects.
[0185] The data obtained from the cell culture assays and animal studies can be used in formulating a range of dosage for use in humans. The dosage of such compounds lies particularly within a range of circulating concentrations that include the ED50 with little or no toxicity. The dosage may vary within this range depending upon the dosage form employed and the route of administration utilized. For any compound used in the method of the invention, the therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially from cell culture assays. A dose may be formulated in animal models to achieve a circulating plasma concentration range that includes the IC5O (i.e., the concentration of the test compound which achieves a half-maximal inhibition of symptoms) as determined in cell culture. Such information can be used to more accurately determine useful doses in humans. Levels in plasma may be measured, for example, by high performance liquid chromatography.
[0186] A particular therapeutically effective amount of the compound of the present invention to administer to a subject patient is about 0.1 mg/kg to about 10 mg/kg administered from once to three times a day. For example, an effective regimen of the present method may administer about 5 mg to about 1000 mg of said compound of the present invention from once to three times a day. It will be understood, however, that the specific dose level for any particular subject patient will depend upon a variety of factors including the age, body weight, general health, sex, diet, time of administration, route of administration, rate of excretion, drug combination and the severity of the particular inflammatory condition. A consideration of these factors is well within the purview of the ordinarily skilled clinician for the purpose of determining the therapeutically effective or prophylactically effective dosage amount needed to prevent, counter, or arrest the progress of the condition.
[0187] For the prevention and/or treatment of long-term conditions, the regimen for treatment usually stretches over many months or years so oral dosing provides particular patient convenience and tolerance. With oral dosing, one to five and especially two to four and typically three oral doses per day are representative regimens. Using these dosing patterns, each dose provides from about 0.01 to about 20 mg/kg of the compound of the invention, with particular doses each providing from about 0.1 to about 10 mg/kg and especially about 1 to about 5 mg/kg.
[0188] Transdermal doses are generally selected to provide similar or lower blood levels than are achieved using injection doses.
[0189] When used to prevent the onset of a condition related to bone and/or cartilage degradation the compounds of this invention will be administered to a patient at risk for developing the condition, typically on the advice and under the supervision of a physician, at the dosage levels described above. Patients at risk for developing a particular condition generally include those who have been identified by genetic testing or screening to be particularly susceptible to developing said condition. [0190] The compounds of this invention can be administered as the sole active agent or they can be administered in combination with other agents, including other compounds that demonstrate the same
or a similar therapeutic activity and that are determined to safe and efficacious for such combined administration.
[0191] The present invention will now be described in detail with reference to specific examples of compounds and methods for their production. Within this specification embodiments have been described in a way that enables a clear and concise specification to be written, but it will be appreciated that embodiments may be variously combined or separated without parting from the invention.
EXAMPLES
1. Synthetic Preparation of Compounds of the Invention
[0192] The compounds of this invention can be prepared from readily available starting materials using the following general methods and procedures. It will be appreciated that where typical or particular process conditions (i.e., reaction temperatures, times, mole ratios of reactants, solvents, pressures, etc.) are given; however, other process conditions can also be used unless otherwise stated. Optimum reaction conditions may vary with the particular reactants or solvent used, but such conditions can be determined by one skilled in the art by routine optimization procedures.
[0193] Additionally, as will be apparent to those skilled in the art, conventional protecting groups may be necessary to prevent certain functional groups from undergoing undesired reactions. The choice of a suitable protecting group for a particular functional group as well as suitable conditions for protection and deprotection are well known in the art. For example, numerous protecting groups, and their introduction and removal, are described in T. W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis, Second Edition, Wiley, New York, 1991, and references cited therein. [0194] The following methods are presented with details as to the preparation of representative compounds that have been listed hereinabove. The compounds of the invention may be prepared from known or commercially available starting materials and reagents by one skilled in the art of organic synthesis.
GENERAL SYNTHETIC PROCEDURES
[0195] The pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidinones compounds of this invention can be prepared from readily available starting materials using the following general methods and procedures. It will be appreciated that where typical or particular process conditions (i.e., reaction temperatures, times, mole ratios of reactants, solvents, pressures, etc.) are given, other process conditions can also be used unless otherwise stated. Optimum reaction conditions may vary with the particular reactants or solvent used, but such conditions can be determined by one skilled in the art by routine optimization procedures. [0196] Additionally, as will be apparent to those skilled in the art, conventional protecting groups may be necessary to prevent certain functional groups from undergoing undesired reactions. The choice of a suitable protecting group for a particular functional group as well as suitable conditions for protection and deprotection are well known in the art. For example, numerous protecting groups, and their introduction and removal, are described in T. W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis, Second Edition, Wiley, New York, 1991, and references cited therein.
[0197] The following representative methods are presented with details as to the preparation of representative pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidinones that have been listed herein above. The compounds of the invention may be prepared from known or commercially available starting materials and reagents by one skilled in the art of organic synthesis.
SYNTHESIS OF INTERMEDIATES
Intermediate 1 5-Chloro-l-methyl-3-propyl-l,6-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-one
A. l-Methyl-3-propyl-l,4-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidine-5,7-dione
[0198] 4-Amino-l-methyl-3-propyl-pyrazole-5-carboxamide (10.9 mmol) is dissolved in acetonitrile (200 mL) and is heated under reflux. Carbonyldiimidazole (CDI, 13 mmol) is added portionwise while maintaining the temperature. After few minutes a precipitate develops. The solution is then kept under reflux until the complete consumption of the starting material (16h). On cooling to room temperature, the suspension is filtered. The resulting solid is dried under reduced pressure. This solid is then used in the next step without further purification.
[0199] MS (ES+) 209.1 (M+l); HPLC tr = 0.85min. (Column used for all LCMS analysis:
Waters Acquity UPLC BEH Cl 8 1.7μm, 2.1mm ID x 50mm L (Part No.186002350)).
B. 5,7-Dichloro-l-methyl-3-propyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidine
[0200] l-Methyl-3-propyl-l,4-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidine-5,7-dione (4.8mmol) is dissolved in phosphorus oxychloride at room temperature, under nitrogen. A trace of N,N- dimethylformamide is added to the reaction mixture and the solution is then heated under reflux for 7h- 16h. On complete reaction, the excess of phosphorus oxychloride is removed under reduced pressure. The reaction mixture is poured onto ice/water and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic layer is dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate. Removal of solvent under reduced pressure afforded a soft solid, which may be used without further purification in the next step. [0201] MS (ES+) 245.1 (M+l); 247 (M+3); HPLC tr = 1.41 min.
C. 5-Chloro-l-methyl-3-propyl-l,6-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-one
[0202] Potassium hydroxide (20mmol) is added to a solution of 5,7-dichloro-l-methyl-3-propyl- lH-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidine (4 mmol) in dioxane/water (20 mL/5 mL) at room temperature. The solution is heated under reflux for Ih .After complete reaction, the mixture is allowed to cool to room temperature. The solution is treated with dilute aqueous hydrochloric acid (2M) until a pH of 1 is achieved and then it is extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase is dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate and then the solvent is removed under reduced pressure to afford 5-chloro-l-methyl-3-propyl-l,6-dihydro- pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-one.
[0203] MS (ES+) 227.1 (M+l); HPLC tr = 1.04 min. NMR (1H, DMSO) 3.9 (3H, s, CH3); 2.6
(2H, d, J=7.2Hz, CH2); 1. 69 (2H, q, J=7.2Hz, CH2), 0.91 (3H, t, J=7.2Hz, CH3).
Intermediate 2 5-Chloro-l-methyl-3-t-butyl-l,6-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-one
H
A. 5,5-Dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-hexanoic acid ethyl ester:
[0204] A mixture of tert-butyl ketone (499 mmol) and diethyl oxalate (548 mmol) in ethanol
(550 mL) is added slowly to the solution of sodium (499 mmol) in ethanol (250 mL) at room temperature. After addition, the reaction mixture is heated to 600C for 2 h. On complete reaction, the ethanol is removed under reduced pressure and aqueous hydrochloric acid (2M, 200 mL) is added to the residue. The aqueous phase is extracted with ethyl acetate (500 mL x 3), washed with water (300 mL), saturated aqueous sodium chloride (300 mL) and it is then dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. The solvent is then removed under reduced pressure to afford 5,5-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-hexanoic acid ethyl ester as orange colored liquid (72.5g, 70%).
[0205] 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ: 1.20 (s, 9H), 1.35 (t, 3H), 4.34 (q, 2H), 6.53 (s, IH), 14.75
(bs, IH). Mass (m/z): 201 (M+H).
B. 5-tørf-Butyl-2//-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid ethyl ester:
[0206] Hydrazine hydrate (446 mmol) is added dropwise to solution of 5,5-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo- hexanoic acid ethyl ester (360 mmol) in ethanol at room temperature. After addition, the reaction mixture is stirred overnight at room temperature. On completion, the solvent is removed under reduced pressure and the residue obtained is diluted with water (250 mL) and extracted with dichloromethane (250 mL x are3). The combined organic phases are washed with saturated aqueous sodium chloride and then dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure to afford 5-tert-butyl-2H- pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid ethyl ester as a white crystalline solid (70%).
[0207] 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ: 13.21 (bs, IH), 6.45 (s, IH), 4.23 (q, 2H), 1.27 (s,
9H,)1.25 (t, 3H). Mass (m/z): 197 (M+H).
C. 5-terf-Butyl-2-methyl-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid ethyl ester:
[0208] Dimethyl sulfate (250 mmol) is added to a solution of 5-tert-butyl-2H-pyrazole-3- carboxylic acid ethyl ester (250 mmol) in toluene (500 mL) and stirred at 900C for 2.5h. On completion, the reaction mixture is diluted with dichloromethane (500 mL) and washed with water (250 mL) followed by washings with saturated aqueous sodium carbonate (250 mL) and saturated aqueous sodium chloride. The combined organic phases are dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate and the solvent is then removed under reduced pressure to afford the title compound 5-fert-butyl-2-methyl-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid ethyl ester as a brown liquid (39.4g, 75%).
[0209] 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-^6) δ: 6.70 (s, IH), 4.27 (q, 2H), 4.01 (s, 3H) , 1.29 (t, 3H),
1.24 (s, 9H). Mass (m/z): 211 (M+H).
D. 5-tørf-Butyl-2-methyl-2//-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid:
[0210] Aqueous of sodium hydroxide (2M, 100 mL) is added to 5-fert-butyl-2-methyl-2H- pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (185 mmol) and the reaction mixture is heated under reflux for 2.5h. On completion, the reaction mixture is allowed to cool to room temperature, diluted with water (100 mL) and treated with aqueous hydrochloric acid (30%) until a pΗ of 2 is obtained. The precipitated solid is collected by filtration, washed with water and dried at 600C for 24h to afford 5-fert-butyl-2-methyl-2H- pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid as an off-white solid (27.1g, 80%).
[0211] 1H NMR (400 MHz, OMSO-d6) δ: 13.19 (bs, IH) , 6.66 (s, IH), 3.99 (s, 3H), 1.23 (s,
9H). Mass (m/z): 183 (M+H).
E. 5-tørt-Butyl-2-methyl-4-nitro-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid:
[0212] Oleum (816 mmol) is slowly added to fuming nitric acid (890 mmol) at 00C followed by the addition of 5-ter?-butyl-2-methyl-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid (148 mmol) in small portions. After addition, the reaction mixture is stirred at 600C for 4h. On completion, the reaction mixture is cooled to room temperature and poured into crushed ice. The aqueous phase is then extracted with ethyl acetate (250 mL x 3). The combined organic phases are washed with water (200 mL x 2) and dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure to afford 5-tert-butyl-2-methyl- 4-nitro-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid as light yellow solid (24.2g, 72%). [0213] 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-^6) δ: 3.96 (s, 3H), 1.29 (s, 9H). Mass (m/z): 228 (M+H).
F. 5-tørf-Butyl-2-methyl-4-nitro-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid amide:
[0214] Thionyl chloride (1350mmol) is added slowly to 5-tert-butyl-2-methyl-4-nitro-2H- pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid (105mmol) at room temperature and after addition the reaction mixture is heated under reflux at (800C) for 3h. On completion, thionyl chloride is removed from the reaction mixture under reduced pressure. The residue obtained is dissolved in acetone (100 mL) and cooled to 00C. Aqueous ammonia (110 mL) is then added slowly until a pΗ of 10 is obtained. The solid is collected by filtration, washed with cold water and the wet compound thus obtained is then dried under vacuum to
afford 5-tert-butyl-2-methyl-4-nitro-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid amide as a cream colored solid (19. Ig,
80%).
[0215] 1H NMR (400 MHz, OMSO-d6) δ: 8.43 (bs, IH) , 8.21 (bs, IH) , 3.76 (s, 3H), 1.36 (s,
9H). Mass (m/z): 227 (M+H).
G. 4-Amino-5-fert-butyl-2-methyl-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid amide:
[0216] To 5-tert-butyl-2-methyl-4-nitro-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid amide (84 mmol) in ethanol is added Palladium (10% on charcoal, 2g) and the reaction mixture is stirred under a hydrogen atmosphere (Parr shaker, 40PSI). On completion, the reaction mixture is filtered through a celite pad and the solvent is then removed under reduced pressure to afford 4-amino-5-fert-butyl-2-methyl-2H-pyrazole- 3-carboxylic acid amide as a pale yellow solid (12g, 75%).
[0217] IR (KBr) 630.19, 831.44, 1040.03, 1256.61, 1303.62, 1366.35, 1458.45, 1484.25,
1668.90, 2970.98, 3307.88, 3381.63 cm4. 1H NMR (400 MHz, OMSO-d6) δ: 1.26 (s, 9H), 3.83 (s, 3H), 4.05 (s, 2H), 7.60 (bs, 2H); 13 C NMR (100 MHz, OMSO-d6) δ: 29.3386, 32.2505, 39.6196, 125.1198, 127.5546, 150.4791, 162.6271. Mass (m/z): 197 (M+H). M.p. 127-129 0C
H. 5-Chloro-l-methyl-3- tert-butyl -l,6-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-one
[0218] This intermediate may be obtained using the same reaction sequence as described for 5- chloro- 1 -methyl-3 -propyl- 1 ,6-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-one, starting with 4-amino-5-tert- butyl-2-methyl-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid amide instead of 4-amino-l-methyl-3-propyl-pyrazole-5- carboxamide.
[0219] MS (ES+): 223 (M+ 1). NMR (1H, CDCl3): 13.15 (IH, s, NH); 4.08 (3H, s, CH3); 1.37
(3H, s, CH3).
Intermediate 3 5-Chloro-l-ethyl-3- tert-butyl -l,6-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-one
A B
A. 5-tert-buty\ -2-ethyl-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid ethyl ester
[0220] To a suspension of sodium hydride (20 mmol) in N,N-dimethylformamide (5 mL) at 00C is added a solution of 5-tert-butyl-2-ethyl-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid ethyl ester. The resulting mixture is stirred for 30min at room temperature before being cooled to 00C. Ethyl bromide (40 mmol) is then added dropwise. The resulting mixture is heated to 55°C for 18h. On complete reaction, the mixture is cooled to room temperature and diluted with water (50 mL). Extraction of the mixture with methyl tert-butyl ether
is then performed (50 mL x 2). The combined organic phases are then washed with saturated aqueous sodium chloride (50 mL) and dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. Following filtration, the solvent is removed under reduced pressure. Crude compound (2.2g) is purified by column chromatography using silica gel, eluting with 1% ethyl acetate, hexane. The product is isolated as a yellow liquid. [0221] Compound wt: 1.3g. Yield: 57%. NMR (1H, CDCl3): 6.6 (IH, s, CH); 4.55 (2H, q, CH2);
4.55 (2H, q, CH2); 1.2-1.4 (15H, m, 5xCH3).
B. 5-Chloro-l-ethyl-3- tert-buty\ -l,6-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-one
[0222] This intermediate may be obtained using the same reaction sequence as described for 5- chloro-l-methyl-3- tert butyl- l,6-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-one, starting with 2-ethyl-5-tert- butyl-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid ethyl ester instead of 2-methyl-5-tert-butyl-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid ethyl ester.
[0223] MS (ES+): 255 (M+l), HPLC rt: 1.33min. NMR (1H, CDCl3) 4.46 (2H, q, J=7.2, NCH2);
1.38 (9H, s, 3xCH3); 1.35 (2H, t, J=I.2, CH3).
Intermediate 4 5-Chloro-l-ethyl-3-propyl-l,6-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-one
A
A. 5-Chloro-l-ethyl-3- propyl -l,6-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-one
[0224] This intermediate may be obtained using the same reaction sequence as described for 5- chloro- 1 -ethyl-3-tert-butyl- 1 ,6-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-one starting with 5-propyl-pyrazole-
3-carboxylic acid ethyl ester instead of 5-tert-butyl-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid ethyl ester.
[0225] MS (ES+): 226.9 (M+l), HPLC rt: 1.04min. NMR (1H, CDCl3) 4.46 (2H, q, J 7.2,
NCH2); 2.6 (2H, d, J=7.2Hz, CH2); 1. 69 (2H, q, J 7.2, CH2), 1.35 (2H, t, J 7.2, CH3), 0.91 (3H, t, J 7.2,
CH3).
A. 2-/sø-propyl-5-ferf-butyl -pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid ethyl ester
[0226] To a suspension of sodium hydride (20 mmol) in N,N-dimethylformamide (5 mL) a solution of 5-tert-butyl pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (10 mmol) in N,N-dimethylformamide (5ml) is added at 00C. The resulting mixture is then stirred for 30 min at RT and cooled to 00C, then iso- propyl bromide (40mmol) is added dropwise. The resulting mixture is heated to 55°C for 18h. Comnsumption of the starting material is monitored by TLC. The reaction mixture is cooled to room temperature and diluted with water (50 mL). Extraction with methyl tert-butyl ether (50 mL x 2)is then performed. The combined organic phases are then washed with saturated aqueous sodium chloride (50 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate and filtered. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure. This compound may be used in subsequent steps without further purification.
B. 5-Chloro-l-/sø-propyl-3- propyl -l,6-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-one
[0227] This intermediate may be obtained using the same reaction sequence as described for 5- chloro- 1 -methyl-3-tert-butyl- 1 ,6-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-one, starting with 2-z,rø-propyl-5- propyl-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid ethyl ester instead of 2-methyl-5-tert-butyl -pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid ethyl ester.
[0228] MS (ES+): 255 (M+l), HPLC rt: 1.26min. NMR (1H, DMSO): 5.31 (IH, q, J=6.4Hz,
CH); 2.77 (2H, t, J=7.9Hz, CH2); 1.75 (2H, t, J=7.6Hz, CH2); 1.48 (6H, d, J=6.4Hz, 2*CH3); 0.97 (3H, t, J=7.2Hz, CH3).
Intermediate 6 5-Chloro-3-propyl-l ,6-dihydro-pyrazolo [4,3-d] pyrimidin-7-one
A. 5-Chloro-3- propyl -1,6-dihydro-pyrazolo [4,3-d] pyrimidin-7-one
[0229] This intermediate may be obtained using the same reaction sequence as described for 5- chloro- 1 -ethyl-3-tert-butyl- 1 ,6-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-one, starting with 5-propyl-2H- pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid ethyl ester instead of 2-methyl-5-tert-butyl-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid ethyl ester.
[0230] MS (ES+): 212.1 (M+ 1), HPLC rt: 0.90min. NMR (1H, CDCl3) 2.5 (2H, d, J=7.2Hz,
CH2); 1. 65 (2H, q, J 7.2Hz, CH2), 0.91 (3H, t, J 7.2Hz, CH3).
Intermediate 7
3-Bromo-5-[(4-fluoro-benzyl)-(3-morpholin-4-yl-propyl)-amino]-l-methyl-l,6-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3- d] pyrimidin-7-one
A. 2-Methyl-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid
[0231] To a stirred solution of 1 -methyl- lH-pyrazole (609 mmol) in dry ether (600 mL) under an atmosphere of nitrogen is added a solution of n-BuLi in hexane (2.6 M, 670 mmol) dropwise at -78°C over a period of Ih. The reaction mixture is then stirred at this temperature for a further 1 h, and then dry carbon dioxide gas is passed through the mixture at -78°C for 30 min. The reaction mixture is then allowed to warm to room temperature and quenched with water (500 mL). The aqueous phase is separated, washed with ether (500 mL) and cooled to 2-3 0C. To the stirred mixture is added concentrated aqueous hydrochloric acid until a pΗ of 3 is obtained. The resulting precipitate is collected by filtration, washed with ice-cold water (20 mL), dried first in open air, and then in a vacuum desiccator over P2O5 to afford 2-methyl-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid as a white powder.
[0232] Compound wt: 35.3g, 45.4% yield. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSOi6) δ: 13.31 (IH, bs);
7.50 (IH, d); 6.81 (IH, d); 4.07 (3H, s).
B. 2-Methyl-4-nitro-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid
[0233] Oleum (1977mmol) is slowly added to fuming nitric acid (777 mmol) followed by the addition of 2-methyl-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid (277 mmol) in small portions maintaining the reaction temperature below 600C. Stirring at this temperature is then continued for a further 1 h. On completion, the reaction mixture is poured onto crushed ice and extracted with ethyl acetate (300 mL x 3). The combined organic phases are washed with water (250 mL x 2) and dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure to afford 2-methyl-4-nitro-2H-pyrazole-3- carboxylic acid as a light yellow solid. Compound wt: 23.6g, 50%. [0234] 1H NMR (400 MHz, OMSO-d6) δ: 8.29 (lH,s); 3.95 (3H, s).
C. 2-Methyl-4-nitro-2//-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid amide
[0235] A mixture of 2-methyl-4-nitro-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid (138.8 mmol) and thionyl chloride (300 mL) is heated under reflux for 12 h. The mixture is then concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure. The resulting oil is dissolved in acetone (200 mL) and it is added to cold aqueous ammonium hydroxide with stirring. The precipitate is collected by filtration and it is dried to give 2- methyl-4-nitro-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid amide as an off-white solid. Compound wt: 10.5g, 45% yield.
[0236] 1H NMR (400 MHz, OMSO-d6) δ: 8.47 (IH, s); 8.32 (IH, s); 8.27 (IH, s); 3.86 (3H, s).
D. 4-Amino-2-methyl-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid amide
[0237] To 2-methyl-4-nitro-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid amide (61.2 mmol) in ethanol (100 mL) is added Palladium (1 g, 10 % on Charcoal) and the reaction mixture is stirred under hydrogen atmosphere (Parr shaker, 40PSI) for five hours. On completion, the reaction mixture is filtered through a celite pad and the solvent is then removed under reduced pressure to give 4-amino-2-methyl-2H-pyrazole- 3-carboxylic acid amide as a pale yellow solid. Compound wt: 6.9g, 80% yield. [0238] M.p. 158-160 0C. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-^6) δ: 7.37 (2H, bs); 7.01 (IH, s); 4.44
(2H, bs); 3.88 (3H, s). 13 C NMR (IOO MHz, DMSO-^6) δ: 38.80, 122.9788, 129.1571, 132.5167, 161.8173; Mass (m/z): 141 (M+H)
E. l-Methyl-3a,7a-dihydro-l//-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidine-5,7-diol
[0239] To a stirred solution of 4-amino-2-methyl-2H-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid amide (46.7 mmol) in acetonitrile (100 mL), heated under reflux, is added carbonyldiimidazole (68.6 mmol) over a period of 1 h.The reaction mixture is heated under reflux for a further 24 h. On completion, the reaction mixture is cooled and the precipitated solid is collected by filtration and it is then dried completely to afford l-methyl-3a,7a-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidine-5,7-diol as a light yellow solid. Compound wt: 6.2g, 80% yield.
[0240] 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO- d6) δ: 11.13 (IH, bs); 10.98 (IH, bs); 7.34 (IH, s); 4.04
(3H, s).
F. 3-Bromo-l-methyl-3a,7a-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidine-5,7-diol
[0241] To a mixture of l-methyl-3a,7a-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidine-5,7-diol
(36. lmmol) and NBS (43.4 mmol) in acetonitrile (120 mL) is added acetic acid (0.5 mL) and the reaction mixture is heated under reflux for 6 h. On completion, the reaction mixture is cooled to room temperature.
The white precipitate obtained via this method may be collected by filtration and dried to give 3-bromo-l- methyl-3a,7a-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidine-5,7-diol as a brown solid. Compound wt: 4.9g, 55% yield.
[0242] 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO- d6) δ: 11.10 (IH, bs); 10.95 (IH, bs); 4.03 (3H, s). Mass
(m/z): 243 (M-2H), 245 (M-IH).
G. 3-Bromo-5,7-dichloro-l-methyl-3a,7a-dihydro-l//-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidine
[0243] A solution of 3-bromo- 1 -methyl-3a,7a-dihydro- lH-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidine-5,7-diol
(18.4mmol) in phosphorus oxychloride (100ml) is heated to 1200C for 16h. On completion, the excess of phosphorus oxychloride is then removed under reduced pressure from reaction mixture. The residue is poured onto crushed ice and the solid that may be obtained is collected by filtration. After drying, the crude product is purified by column chromatography (60-120 mesh silica gel) eluting with ethyl acetate: hexane (2:8) to afford title 3-bromo-5,7-dichloro-l-methyl-3a,7a-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidine as an off-white solid. Compound wt: 2.32 g, 45 % yield. [0244] 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO- d6) δ: 4.31(3H, s). Mass (m/z): 282 (M+H), 284(M+2H).
H. 3-Bromo-5-chloro-l-methyl-3a,7a-dihydro-l//-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-ol
[0245] To a stirred solution of 3-bromo-5,7-dichloro- 1 -methyl-3a,7a-dihydro- lH-pyrazolo[4,3- d]pyrimidine (7.83 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (10 mL) is added aqueous potassium hydroxide (6 M, 15 mL) dropwise at 0-50C. The reaction mixture is then stirred at room temperature for 2h. On completion, the reaction mixture is treated with aqueous hydrochloric acid (2 M) until a pΗ of 2 is obtained. Extraction with ethyl acetate (20 mL x 3) is performed and the combined organic phases are washed with saturated aqueous sodium chloride. After being dried over anhydrous sulfate, the solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The crude compound is then purified by washing with ether to afford 3-bromo-5-chloro- l-methyl-3a,7a-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-ol as a light yellow solid. Compound wt: 1.85g, 90% yield.
[0246] 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO- d6) δ: 4.15 (3H, s). 13 C NMR (100 MHz, DMSO-^6) δ:
38.6165, 118.1215, 125.8725, 137.0813, 141.3023, 153.2573. Mass (m/z): 263 (M+, 100%), 265 (M+2H, 100). M.p. 260-2620C
I. 3-Bromo-5-[(4-fluoro-benzyl)-(3-morpholin-4-yl-propyl)-amino]-l-methyl-l,6-dihydro- pyrazolo [4,3-d] pyrimidin-7-one
[0247] A solution of 3-bromo-5-chloro- 1 -methyl- 1 ,6-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-one
(0.615 mmol), (4-fluoro-benzyl)-(3-morpholin-4-yl-propyl)-amine (0.923 mL) and N,N-
diisopropylethylamine (1.845 mmol) in tert-butanol (3 mL) is heated to 110 0C . On complete reaction the mixture is allowed to cool to room temperature. The solvents are removed under reduced pressure and the solid is dissolved in dichloromethane and washed with water (20 mL x 2). Removal of solvent under reduced pressure gave the crude product which may be used in subsequent steps without further purification.
[0248] MS (ES+) 479.0 (M+l), 481.0 (M+3); HPLC rt = 1.04 min.
REPRESENTATIVE METHODS
Method A
[0249] The corresponding amine (0.26mmol) is added to a solution of corresponding Cl- derivative (one of intermediates 1 to 6) (8.84.10"2mmol) in t-BuOH (0.5 mL). The reaction is then heated in a sealed tube (1000C to 1200C) for 12-72L After completion of the reaction (monitored by LCMS), the mixture is allowed to cool to room temperature. The solvent is then removed under reduced pressure to give the crude product. The final compound may be isolated by preparative HPLC (yield 10-50%). [0250] Analytical: Waters Acquity UPLC BEH C 18 1.7μm, 2. lmm ID x 50mm L (Part
No.186002350). Preparative HPLC: Waters XBridge Prep C18 5μm ODB 19mm ID x 100mm L (Part No.186002978). All the methods use MeCN/H2O gradients. H2O contains either 0.1% Trifluoroacetic acid (TFA) or 0.1% Ammonia.
Method B
[0251] To the corresponding primary amine (4.8mmol) in THF (25 mL) at room temperature are added aldehyde (5.6 mmol) and anhydrous magnesium sulfate (0.75 g). After stirring for 1.5h at room temperature, sodium borohydride (4.8mmol) is added and the mixture is then stirred for a further 2h. Water (10-15 mL) is added to the mixture and stirring resumes for a further 30-60min. Additional water is added (20-30 mL) and the mixture is extracted with dichloromethane (40 mL x 3). After being dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate the solvent is removed under reduced pressure to give the crude product. This material may be used in subsequent steps without further purification.
[0252] The amine obtained following the method decribed in the previous step (0.26mmol) is added to a solution of corresponding chloro-derivative (8.84.10" mmol) in t-BuOH (0.5 mL). The reaction is heated in a sealed tube to 1000C for 12-72L On completion of the reaction (monitored by LCMS), the mixture is allowed to cool to room temperature and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The final compound is isolated by preparative HPLC (yield 10-50%).
[0253] Analytical: Waters Acquity UPLC BEH C 18 1.7μm, 2. lmm ID x 50mm L (Part
No.186002350). Preparative HPLC: Waters XBridge Prep C18 5μm ODB 19mm ID x 100mm L (Part No.186002978). All the methods use MeCN/H2O gradients. H2O contains either 0.1% Trifluoroacetic acid (TFA) or 0.1% Ammonia.
Method C
[0254] In a homogeneous solution of Pd(dppf)Cl2 (0.012 mmol) and 3-Bromo-5-[(4- fluoro-benzyl)-(3-morpholin-4-yl-propyl)-amino]- 1 -methyl- 1 ,6-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3- d]pyrimidin-7-one (0.122 mmol), 1.4-dioxane (0.8 mL) and water (0.4 mL) is added potassium carbonate (0.244 mmol) and boronic acid (0.244 mmol). The reaction is the heated to 1200C under microwave irradiation for 40min. On cooling to room temperature, the solvents are removed under reduced pressure. The crude product is further purified by preparative HPLC. [0255] Preparative HPLC: Waters XBridge Prep C18 5μm ODB 19mm ID x 100mm L.
All the methods use MeCNZH2O gradients. H2O contains either 0.1% Trifluoroacetic acid (TFA) or 0.1% Ammonia. Microwave: Explorer PSL, CEM discover Nr. 020621.
Example 11
S-^lH-l^^-triazol-l-ylJbenzylJ^yclohexylmethylJaminoJ-l-methyl-S-propyl-lH-pyrazolo^^- d] pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
[0256] To 1 ,2,4-triazol- 1 -yl-benzylamine (0.5 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (2 mL) at room temperature are added cyclohexylmethylaldehyde (0.6 mmol)) and anhydrous magnesium sulfate (60 mg). After stirring for 1.5h at room temperature, sodium borohydride (0.5 mmol) is added and the mixture is then stirred for a further 2h. Water (3 mL) is added to the mixture and stirring resumes for 1 Omin. Additional water is added (1 mL) and the mixture is then extracted with dichlorormethane (10 mL x 3). After being dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate the solvent is removed under reduced pressure to give the crude product. This material may be used in subsequent steps without further purification. [0257] The amine obtained using the methods described in the previous step (0.26mmol) is added to a solution of chloro-l-methyl-3-propyl-l,6-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-one (0.13 mmol) in t-BuOH (0.5 mL). The reaction is heated in a sealed tube tot 1000C for 24h. On completion of the reaction (monitored by LCMS), the mixture is allowed to cool to room temperature and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The final compound may be isolated by preparative HPLC. [0258] Preparative HPLC: Waters XBridge Prep C 18 5μm ODB 19mm ID x 100mm L. The method uses MeCN/H2O 55-80% gradients. H2O contains 0.1% Trifluoroacetic acid (TFA).
Example 12
5-((3,4-dichlorobenzyl)(4,4,4-trifluorobutyl)amino)-l-methyl-3-propyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3- d] pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
[0259] To 3,4-dichlorobenzylamine (0.5 mmol) in THF (2 mL) at room temperature are added
4,4,4-trifluorobutanal (0.6 mmol)) and anhydrous magnesium sulfate (60 mg). After stirring for 1.5h at room temperature, sodium borohydride (0.5 mmol) is added and the mixture is then stirred for a further 2h. Water (3 mL) is added to the mixture and stirring then resumes for 1 Omin. Additional water is added (1 mL) and the mixture is extracted with dichloromethane (10 mL x 3). After being dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate the solvent is removed under reduced pressure to give the crude product. This material is used in subsequent steps without further purification.
[0260] The amine obtained using the methods described in the previous step (0.26mmol) is added to a solution of chloro-l-methyl-3-propyl-l,6-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-one (0.13mmol) in t-BuOH (0.5 mL). The reaction is heated in a sealed tube to 1000C for 24h. On complete reaction (monitored by LCMS), the mixtuse is allowed to cool to room temperature and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The final compound may be isolated by preparative HPLC. [0261] Preparative HPLC: Waters XBridge Prep Cl 8 5μm ODB 19mm ID x 100mm L. The method uses MeCN/H2O 65-90% gradients. H2O contains 0.1% Trifluoroacetic acid (TFA).
Example 16
5-((Bicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-2-ylmethyl)(3-morpholinobenzyl)amino)-l-methyl-3-propyl-lH- pyrazolo [4,3-d] pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
[0262] To 3-morpholinobenzylamine (0.5 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (2 mL) at room temperature are added bicyclo[2,2,l]heptane-2-carboxaldehyde (0.6 mmol) and anhydrous magnesium sulfate (60 mg). After stirring for 1.5h at room temperature, sodium borohydride (0.5mmol) is added and the mixture is then stirred for a further 2h. Water (3 mL) is added to the mixture and stirring resumes for 1 Omin. Additional water is added (1 mL) and the mixture is extracted with dichloromethane (10 mL x 3). After being dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate the solvent is removed under reduced pressure to give the crude product. This material is used in subsequent steps without further purification. [0263] The amine obtained using the methods described in the previous step (0.26 mmol) is added to a solution of chloro-l-methyl-3-propyl-l,6-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-one (0.13mmol) in t-BuOH (0.5ml). The reaction is then heated in a sealed tube to 1000C for 24h. On complete reaction
(monitored by LCMS), the mixture is allowed to cool to room temperature and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The final compound may be isolated by preparative HPLC.
[0264] Preparative HPLC: Waters XBridge Prep C 18 5μm ODB 19mm ID x 100mm L. The method uses MeCN/H2O 65-90% gradients. H2O contains 0.1% Trifluoroacetic acid (TFA)
Example 17 l-methyl-5-((3-morpholinobenzyl)(2-(tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl)ethyl)amino)-3-propyl-lH- pyrazolo [4,3-d] pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
[0265] To 3-morpholinobenzylamine (0.5 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (2 mL) at room temperature are added (tetrahydro-pyran-4-yl)-acetaldehyde (0.6 mmol)) and anhydrous magnesium sulfate (60 mg). After stirring for 1.5h at room temperature, sodium borohydride (0.5 mmol) is added and the mixture is then stirred for a further 2h. Water (3 mL) is added to the mixture and stirring resumes for 1 Omin. Additional water is added (1 mL) and the mixture is extracted with dichloromethane (10 mL x 3). After being dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate the solvent is removed under reduced pressure to give the crude product. This material may then be used in subsequent steps without further purification. [0266] The amine obtained using the methods described in the previous step (0.26mmol) is added to a solution of chloro-l-methyl-3-propyl-l,6-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-one (0.13mmol) in t-BuOH (0.5 mL). The reaction is heated in a sealed tube to 1000C for 24h. On complete reaction (monitored by LCMS), the mixture is allowed to cool to room temperature and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The final compound may be isolated by preparative HPLC. [0267] Preparative HPLC: Waters XBridge Prep Cl 8 5μm ODB 19mm ID x 100mm L. The method used MeCN/H2O 45-70% gradients. H2O contained 0.1% Trifluoroacetic acid (TFA)
Example 28
3-ter^-butyl-5-((cyclohexylmethyl)((2-morpholinopyridin-4-yl)methyl)amino)-l-methyl-lH- pyrazolo [4,3-d] pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
[0268] To (2-morpholinopyrid-4-yl)methylamine (0.5 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (2 mL) at room temperature are added cyclohexylmethylaldehyde (0.6 mmol) and anhydrous magnesium sulfate (60mg). After stirring for 1.5h at room temperature, sodium borohydride (0.5mmol) is added and the mixture is
thenstirred for a further 2h. Water (3 mL) is added to the mixture and stirring resumes for lOmin.
Additional water is added (1 mL) and the mixture is extracted with dichloromethane (10 mL x 3). After being dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate the solvent is removed under reduced pressure to give the crude product. This material may then be used in subsequent steps without further purification.
[0269] The amine obtained using the methods described in the previous step (0.26mmol) is added to a solution of chloro-l-methyl-3-tert-butyl-l,6-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-one
(0.13mmol) in t-BuOH (0.5ml). The reaction is heated in a sealed tube to 1000C for 24h. On complete reaction (monitored by LCMS), the mixture is allowed to cool to room temperature and the solvent is then removed under reduced pressure. The final compound is isolated by preparative HPLC.
[0270] Preparative HPLC: Waters XBridge Prep Cl 8 5μm ODB 19mm ID x 100mm L. The method uses MeCN/H2O 35-60% gradients. H2O contains 0.1% Trifluoroacetic acid (TFA).
Example 29
3-tert-butyl-5-((4-fluorobenzyl)(3-morpholinopropyl)amino)-l-methyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3- d] pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
[0271] To 4-fluorobenzylamine (0.5 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (2 ml) at room temperature are added 3-morpholinopropanal (0.6 mmol) and anhydrous magnesium sulfate (60 mg). After stirring for 1.5h at room temperature, sodium borohydride (0.5 mmol) is then added and the mixture is stirred for a further 2h. Water (3 mL) is added to the mixture and stirring resumes for 1 Omin. Additional water is added (1 mL) and the mixture is extracted with dichloromethane (10 mL x 3). After being dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate the solvent is removed under reduced pressure to give the crude product. This material may be used in subsequent steps without further purification.
[0272] The amine obtained using the methods described in the previous step (0.26mmol) is added to a solution of chloro-l-methyl-3-tert-butyl-l,6-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-one (0.13 mmol) in t-BuOH (0.5 mL). The reaction is heated in a sealed tube to 1000C for 24h. On complete reaction (monitored by LCMS), the mixture is allowed to cool to room temperature and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The final compound may be isolated by preparative HPLC. [0273] Preparative HPLC: Waters XBridge Prep C 18 5μm ODB 19mm ID x 100mm L. The method uses MeCN/H2O 35-60% gradients. H2O contains 0.1% Trifluoroacetic acid (TFA)
Example 30
3-tert-butyl-5-((cyclohexylmethyl)(4-fluorobenzyl)amino)-l-methyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin- 7(6H)-one
[0274] To 4-fluorobenzylamine (0.5 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (2 mL) at room temperature are added cyclohexylmethylaldehyde (0.6 mmol)) and anhydrous magnesium sulfate (60 mg). After stirring for 1.5h at room temperature, sodium borohydride (0.5mmol) is added and the mixture is then stirred for a further 2h. Water (3 mL) is added to the mixture and stirring resumes for 1 Omin. Additional water is added (1 mL) and the mixture is extracted with dichloromethane (10 mL x 3). After being dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate the solvent is removed under reduced pressure to give the crude product. This material may be used in subsequent steps without further purification.
[0275] The amine obtained using the methods described in the previous step (0.26mmol) is added to a solution of chloro-l-methyl-3-tert-butyl-l,6-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-one (0.13 mmol) in t-BuOH (0.5 mL). The reaction is heated in a sealed tube to 1000C for 24h. On complete reaction (monitored by LCMS), the mixture is allowed to cool to room temperature and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The final compound may be isolated by preparative HPLC. [0276] Preparative HPLC: Waters XBridge Prep C 18 5μm ODB 19mm ID x 100mm L. The method uses MeCN/H2O 75-100% gradients. H2O contains 0.1% Trifluoroacetic acid (TFA)
Example 32 5-((cyclohexylmethyl)(4-fluorobenzyl)amino)-3-propyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
[0277] To 4-fluorobenzylamine (0.5 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (2 mL) at room temperature are added cyclohexylmethylaldehyde (0.6 mmol)) and anhydrous magnesium sulfate (60 mg). After stirring for 1.5h at room temperature, sodium borohydride (0.5 mmol) is added and the mixture is then stirred for a further 2h. Water (3 mL) is added to the mixture and stirring resumes for 1 Omin. Additional water is added (1 mL) and the mixture is extracted with dichloromethane (10 mL x 3). After being dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate the solvent is removed under reduced pressure to give the crude product. This material may be used in subsequent steps without further purification.
[0278] The amine obtained using the methods described in the previous step (0.26mmol) is added to a solution of corresponding 5-chloro-3-propyl-l,6-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-one (0.13mmol) in t-BuOH (0.5 mL). The reaction is heated in a sealed tube to 1000C for 24h. On complete reaction (monitored by LCMS), the mixture is allowed to cool to room temperature and the solvent is then removed under reduced pressure. The final compound may be isolated by preparative HPLC.
[0279] Preparative HPLC: Waters XBridge Prep C 18 5μm ODB 19mm ID x 100mm L. The method uses MeCN/H2O 55-80% gradients. H2O contains 0.1% Trifluoroacetic acid (TFA).
Example 35
3-tert-butyl-5-((cyclohexylmethyl)(3-morpholinobenzyl)amino)-l-methyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3- d] pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
[0280] To 3-morpholinobenzylamine (0.5 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (2 mL) at room temperature are added cyclohexylmethylaldehyde (0.6 mmol)) and anhydrous magnesium sulfate (60 mg). After stirring for 1.5h at room temperature, sodium borohydride (0.5 mmol) is added and the mixture is then stirred for a further 2h. Water (3 mL) is added to the mixture and stirring resumes for 1 Omin. Additional water is added (1 mL) and the mixture is extracted with dichloromethane (10 mL x 3). After being dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate the solvent is removed under reduced pressure to give the crude product. This material may be used in subsequent steps without further purification. [0281] The amine obtained using the methods described in the previous step (0.26mmol) is added to a solution of chloro-l-methyl-3-tert-butyl-l,6-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-one (0.13 mmol) in t-BuOH (0.5 mL). The reaction is heated in a sealed tube to 1000C for 24h. On complete reaction (monitored by LCMS), the mixture is allowed to cool to room temperature and the solvent is then removed under reduced pressure. The final compound may be isolated by preparative HPLC. [0282] Preparative HPLC: Waters XBridge Prep C 18 5μm ODB 19mm ID x 100mm L. The method uses MeCN/H2O 35-60% gradients. H2O contains 0.1% Trifluoroacetic acid (TFA).
Example 37
S-^lH-l^^-triazol-l-ylJbenzylJ^yclohexylmethylJaminoJ-S-tert-butyl-l-methyl-lH-pyrazolo^^- d] pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
[0283] To 1 ,2,4-triazol- 1 -ylbenzylamine (0.5 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (2 mL) at room temperature are added cyclohexylmethylaldehyde (0.6 mmol)) and anhydrous magnesium sulfate (60 mg). After stirring for 1.5h at room temperature, sodium borohydride (0.5 mmol) is added and the mixture is then stirred for a further 2h. Water (3 mL) is added to the mixture and stirring resumes for 1 Omin. Additional water is added (1 mL) and the mixture is extracted with dichloromethane (10 mL x 3). After
being dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate the solvent is removed under reduced pressure to give the crude product. This material may be used in subsequent steps without further purification.
[0284] The amine obtained using the methods described in the previous step (0.26mmol) is added to a solution of chloro-l-methyl-3-tert-butyl-l,6-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-one
(0.13mmol) in t-BuOH (0.5 mL). The reaction is heated in a sealed tube to 1000C for 24h. On complete reaction (monitored by LCMS), the mixture is allowed to cool to room temperature and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The final compound may be isolated by preparative HPLC.
[0285] Preparative HPLC: Waters XBridge Prep Cl 8 5μm ODB 19mm ID x 100mm L. The method uses MeCN/H2O 65-90% gradients. H2O contains 0.1% Trifluoroacetic acid (TFA)
Example 38
5-((cyclohexylmethyl)(4-fluorobenzyl)amino)-l-isopropyl-3-propyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-
7(6H)-one
[0286] To 4-fluorobenzylamine (0.5 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (2 mL) at room temperature are added cyclohexylmethylaldehyde (0.6 mmol) and anhydrous magnesium sulfate (60 mg). After stirring for 1.5h at room temperature, sodium borohydride (0.5mmol) is added and the mixture is then stirred for a further 2h. Water (3 mL) is added to the mixture and stirring resumes for 1 Omin. Additional water is added (1 mL) and the mixture is extracted with dichloromethane (10 mL x 3). After being dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate the solvent is removed under reduced pressure to give the crude product. This material may be used in subsequent steps without further purification.
[0287] The amine obtained using the methods described in the previous step (0.26 mmol) is added to a solution of chloro-l-isopropyl-3-propyl-l,6-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-one (0.13 mmol) in t-BuOH (0.5 mL). The reaction is heated in a sealed tube to 1000C for 24h. On complete reaction (monitored by LCMS), the mixture is allowed to cool to room temperature and the solvent is then removed under reduced pressure. The final compound may be isolated by preparative HPLC. [0288] Preparative HPLC: Waters XBridge Prep C 18 5μm ODB 19mm ID x 100mm L. The method uses MeCN/H2O 75-100% gradients. H2O contains 0.1% Trifluoroacetic acid (TFA).
Example 40
S-^lH-pyrazol-l-ylJbenzylJ^yclopropylmethylJaminoJ-S-tert-butyl-l-methyl-lH-pyrazolo^^- d] pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
[0289] To pyrazol- 1 -ylbenzylamine (0.5 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (2 mL) at room temperature are added cyclopropylmethylaldehyde (0.6 mmol) and anhydrous magnesium sulfate (60 mg). After stirring for 1.5h at room temperature, sodium borohydride (0.5 mmol) is added and the mixture is then stirred for a further 2h. Water (3 mL) is added to the mixture and stirring resumes for 1 Omin. Additional water is added (1 mL) and the mixture is extracted with dichloromethane (10 mL x 3). After being dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate the solvent is removed under reduced pressure to give the crude product. This material may be used in subsequent steps without further purification. [0290] The amine obtained using the methods described in the previous step (0.26 mmol) is added to a solution of chloro-l-methyl-3-tert-butyl-l,6-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-one (0.13 mmol) in t-BuOH (0.5 mL). The reaction is heated in a sealed tube to 1000C for 24h. On complete reaction (monitored by LCMS), the mixture is allowed to cool to room temperature and the solvent is then removed under reduced pressure. The final compound may be isolated by preparative HPLC. [0291] Preparative HPLC: Waters XBridge Prep C 18 5μm ODB 19mm ID x 100mm L. The method uses MeCN/H2O 65-90% gradients. H2O contains 0.1% Trifluoroacetic acid (TFA)
Example 47
3-tert-butyl-5-((cyclohexylmethyl)(3-morpholinobenzyl)amino)-l-ethyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3- d] pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
[0292] To 3-morpholinobenzylamine (0.5 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (2 mL) at room temperature are added cyclohexylmethylaldehyde (0.6 mmol) and anhydrous magnesium sulfate (60 mg). After stirring for 1.5h at room temperature, sodium borohydride (0.5mmol) is added and the mixture is then stirred for a further 2h. Water (3 mL) is added to the mixture and stirring resumes for 1 Omin. Additional water is added (1 mL) and the mixture is then extracted with dichloromethane (10 mL x 3). After being dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate the solvent is then removed under reduced pressure to give the crude product. This material may be used in subsequent steps without further purification. [0293] The amine obtained using the methods described in the previous step (0.26 mmol) is added to a solution of chloro-l-ethyl-3-tert-butyl-l,6-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-one (0.13 mmol) in t-BuOH (0.5 mL). The reaction is heated in a sealed tube to 1000C for 24h. On complete reaction (monitored by LCMS), the mixture is allowed to cool to room temperature and the solvent is then removed under reduced pressure. The final compound may be isolated by preparative HPLC.
[0294] Preparative HPLC: Waters XBridge Prep C 18 5μm ODB 19mm ID x 100mm L. The method uses MeCN/H2O 75-100% gradients. H2O contains 0.1% Trifluoroacetic acid (TFA)
Example 48
[0295] To an homogenized solution of Pd(dppf)Cl2 (0.012 mmol) and 3-Bromo-5-[(4-fluoro- benzyl)-(3-morpholin-4-yl-propyl)-amino]-l -methyl- l,6-dihydro-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7-one (0190 mmol) in a mixture of dioxane (0.8 mL) and water (0.4 mL) is added potassium carbonate (0.244 mmol) and 3-hydroxyphenylboronic acid (0.220mmol). The reaction is heated to 1200C under microwave irradiation for 40min, after which solvents are removed under reduced pressure. The crude solid is purified by preparative HPLC (yield 30%). The method uses MeCN/H2O 15-40% gradient where H2O contains 0.1% TFA.
[0296] In addition to the compounds exemplified above, various other pyrazolo[4,3- d]pyrimidinone compounds of this invention have been prepared using the procedure and synthetic methods described above, or via routine modification of the methods described here, and the corresponding starting materials, appropriate reagents, and purification methods known to those skilled in the art. The compounds prepared along with their analytical data and synthetic method information are listed in Table 1 , below.
[0297] TABLE 1 : pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one derivatives
[0298] TABLE 2: NMR Data for Exemplary Compounds
Pat
NMR (1H, DMSO- d6, 400MHz,) ID
11 (IH, s, NH); 9.25 (IH, s, Ar); 8.20 (IH, s, Ar); 7.73 (2H, m, Ar); 7.48 (IH, t, J 8, Ar); 7.29 (IH, d, J 7, Ar); 4.82 (2H, s, CH2); 4.0 (3H, s, CH3); 3.47 (2H, d, J 6.8, CH2); 2.62
11 (2H, t, J 7.2, CH2); 1.6 (6H, m, CH2); 1.1 (2H, m, CH2); 1.0 (3H, m, CH2); 0.9 (3H, t, J 7.2, CH3).
11.15 (IH, b, NH); 7.58 (2H, m, Ar); 7.26 (IH, s, Ar); 4.73 (2H, s, CH2); 4.01 (3H, s,
12 CH3); 3.52 (2H, t, J 7.6, CH2); 2.61 (2H, t, J 7.6, CH2); 2.25 (2H, m, CH2); 1.77 (2H, m, CH2); 1.63 (2H, q, J 7.2, CH2); 0.85 (3H, t, J 7.6, CH3).
10.89 (IH, b, NH); 7.18 (IH, t, J 7.6, Ar); 6.82 (IH, s, Ar); 6.80 (IH, m, Ar); 6.65 (IH, d, J 7.6, Ar); 4.78 (2H, m, CH2); 4.00 (3H, s, CH3); 3.70 (4H, m, 2xCH2); 3. 5-3.2 (water
16 peak, 4H beneath, 2xCH2); 3.04 (4H, m, 2xCH2); 2.62 (2H, t, J 7.2, CH2); 2.12 (IH, m, CH2); 1.98 (IH, m, CH2); 1.84 (IH, m, CH); 1.48-1.66 (2H, m, CH2); 1.40 (2H, m, CH2); 1.26 (IH, m, CH2); 1.05 (2H, m, CH+CH2); 0.9 (3H, t, J 7.2, CH3); 0.75 (IH, m, CH).
10.7 (IH, b, NH); 7.21 (IH, t, J 7.6, Ar); 6.87 (IH, s, Ar); 6.80 (IH, m, Ar); 6.68 (IH, d, J 7.6, Ar); 4.67 (2H, m, CH2); 4.00 (3H, s, CH3); 3.8 (water peak, 2H beneath, CH2); 3.71
17 (4H, m, 2xCH2); 3.50 (2H, t, J 1.2, CH2); 3.21 (2H, t, J 9.6, CH2); 3.06 (4H, m, 2xCH2); 2.62 (2H, t, J 7.2, CH2); 1.70 (2H, q, J 2, CH2); 1.56 (2H, m, CH2); 1.45 (3H, m, CH+CH2); 1.13 (2H, m, CH2); 0.9 (3H, t, J 7.2, CH3).
11.11 (IH, b, NH); 7.99 (IH, d, J 6.4, Ar); 6.69 (IH, m, Ar); 6.64 (IH, m, Ar); 4.73 (2H,
28 s, CH2); 4.00 (3H, s, CH2); 3.70-3.20 (water peak, 1OH beneath, CH2); 1.65 (6H, m, CH2); 1.29 (9H, s, 3xCH3); 1.12 (3H, m, CH+CH2); 0.95 (2H, m, CH2).
11.16 (IH, b, NH); 7.31 (2H, t, J 5.6, Ar); 7.16 (2H, t, J 8.8, Ar); 4.75 (2H, s, CH2); 4.01
29 (3H, s, CH3); 3.65 (2H, m, CH2); 3.32 (water peak, 4H beneath, 2xCH2); 3.12(6H, m, 3xCH2); 1.94 (2H, m, CH2); 1.34 (9H, s, 3xCH3).
11.11 (IH, b, NH); 7.26 (2H, t, J 6, Ar); 7.15 (2H, t, J 8.8, Ar); 4.73 (2H, s, CH2); 4.00
30 (3H, s, CH3); 3.32 (water peak, 2H beneath, CH2); 1.75 (6H, m, 3xCH2); 1.29 (9H, s, 3xCH3); 1.12 (3H, m, CH+CH2); 0.95 (2H, m, CH2).
10.89 (IH, b, NH); 7.29 (2H, dd, J 8.8, 5.6, Ar); 7.13 (2H, t, J 9.2, Ar); 4.73 (2H, s,
32 CH2); 3.32 (water peak, 2H beneath, CH2); 2.65 (2H, t, J 7.2, CH2); 1.66 (8H, m, 4xCH2); 1.12 (3H, m, CH+CH2); 0.95 (2H, m, CH2); 0.92 (3H, t, J 7.6, CH3).
10.99 (IH, b, NH); 7.15 (IH, t, J 7.6, Ar); 6.8 (IH, m, Ar); 6.66 (IH, d, J 7.2, Ar); 4.70 (2H, s, CH2); 4.00 (3H, s, CH3); 3.70 (4H, t, J 4.8, 2xCH2); 3.20 (water peak, 2H
35 beneath, CH2); 3.02 (4H, t, J 4.4, 2xCH2); 1.65 (6H, m, 3xCH2); 1.29 (9H, s, 3xCH3); 1.12 (3H, m, CH+CH2); 0.95 (2H, m, CH2).
11.04 (IH, b, NH); 9.25 (IH, s, Ar); 8.21 (IH, s, Ar); 7.77 (IH, s, Ar); 7.72 (IH, d, J 7.6, Ar); 7.49 (IH, t, J 7.6, Ar); 7.26 (IH, d, J 7.2, Ar); 4.83 (2H, s, CH2); 3.99 (3H, s, CH3);
37 3.45 (2H, d, J 7.2, CH2); 1.66 (6H, m, 3xCH2); 1.44 (IH, s, CH); 1.30 (9H, s, 3xCH3); 1.13 (2H, m, CH2); 0.99 (2H, m, CH2)
10.68 (IH, b, NH); 7.28 (2H, dd, J 8.8, 6, Ar); 7.13 (2H, dd, J 8.8, 6, Ar); 4.70 (2H, s, CH2); 4.68 (IH, m, CH); 3.32 (water peak, 2H beneath, CH2); 2.75 (2H, t, J 7.2, CH2);
38 1.61 (8H, m, 4xCH2); 1.41 (6H, d, J 6.4, 2xCH3); 1.13 (3H, m, CH, CH2); 0.95 (2H, m, CH2); 0.92 (3H, t, J 7.6, CH3).
11.09 (IH, b, NH); 8.44 (IH, s, Ar); 7.80 (IH, s, Ar); 7.72 (IH, d, J 1.6, Ar); 7.68 (2H, d, J 8.0, Ar); 7.42 (IH, t, J 7.6, Ar); 7.18 (IH, d, J 8.0, Ar); 6.53 (2H, t, J 2.8, Ar); 4.89 (2H,
40 s, CH2); 4.00 (3H, s, CH3); 3.48 (2H, d, J 6.8, CH2); 1.32 (9H, s, 3xCH3); 1.11 (IH, m, CH); 0.43 (2H, m, CH2); 0.25 (2H, m, CH2).
10.89 (IH, b, NH); 7.15 (IH, t, J 7.6, Ar); 6.82 (IH, s, Ar); 6.81 (IH, m, Ar); 6.65 (IH, d, J 7.6, Ar); 4.71 (2H, s, CH2); 4.35 (2H, q, J 7.2, CH2); 3.70 (4H, m, 2xCH2); 3.35 (2H,
47 d, J 7.2, CH2); 3.04 (4H, m, 2xCH2); 1.65 (6H, m, 3xCH2); 1.35 (9H, s, 3xCH3); 1.30 (3H, t, J 7.2, CH3); 1.12 (3H, m, CH+CH3); 0.95 (2H, m, CH2).
11.38 (IH, s, NH); 8.38 (IH, d, J 2.4, Ar); 8.52 (IH, dd, J 1.6, 4.8, Ar); 8.51 (IH, d, J 8 Ar); 7.52 (2H, dd, 5.6, 8.4, Ar); 7.34 (2H, dd, J 8.8, 5.6, Ar); 7.18 (IH, t, J 9.2, Ar); 4.83
48 (2H, s, CH2); 4.17 (3H, s, CH3); 3.60 (4H, m, 2xCH2); 3.45 (2H, m, C
Biological Assays
[0299] For the primary screening, an assay using the cAMP dynamic htrf kit from Cisbio (catnr
62AM2PEB) is used. Its principle is based on HTRF® technology (Homogeneous Time-Resolved
Fluorescence). The method is a competitive immunoassay between native cAMP and the cAMP labeled with XL665. The tracer binding is visualized by a monoclonal antibody against cAMP, labeled with
Cryptate. The specific signal (i.e. energy transfer) is inversely proportional to the concentration of cAMP in the sample (see Figure 1).
[0300] For the enzymatic reaction, a mix is made of 20μL with purified PDElA enzyme, 10OnM cAMP and the compound (lOμM in a final concentration of 1% DMSO) in a black 384-plate. The reaction buffer is Tris 2OmM pH 7.4, 4μg/mLl calmodulin, 3mM MgCl2, 1.5mM CaC12, 0.2mg/mL BSA and
0.001% Brij-35. After an incubation of 30 minutes at room temperature, the reaction is stopped by the addition of lOμL labelled cAMP-XL665 and 10 μL anti-cAMP-Cryptate. After 1 hour incubation at room temperature, the readout is performed on the Envision (excitation 360nm; emission donor 615nm; emission acceptor 665nm).
[0301] PDElA hydro lyses cAMP into 5'AMP; this low cAMP concentration will result in a high signal. A PDElA inhibitor will result in a decrease of the signal.
[0302] As a positive control lOμM Vardenafil (100% inhibition) is used, as negative control 1%
DMSO (0% inhibition) is used, as a variable control lOμM Zaprinast (+/- 50% inhibition) is used, and as negative control compound lOμM Ro-20-1724 (0% inhibition) is used. The positive and negative control are used to calculate z' and PIN values.
[0303] All tested compounds are screened in single at lOμM. The hit criterium is set at PIN 50
(50% inhibition).
[0304] For the dose response and further screening, we use the Cyclic Nucleotide
Phosphodiesterase Assay Kit from Biomol, a colorimetric, non-radioactive assay. The basis for the assay is the cleavage of cAMP by PDElA. The 5'AMP is further cleaved into the nucleoside and phosphate by the enzyme 5 '-nucleotidase (catnr KI-307). The phosphate released due to enzymatic cleavage is quantified using BIOMOL GREENTM reagent (catnr AK-111) in a modified Malachite Green assayl,2.
A PDElA inhibitor will result in a decrease of the signal.
[0305] For the enzymatic reaction a mix of 25μL with purified PDElA enzyme, lOOμM cAMP,
5 'Nucleotidase and the compound is made in a clear 384-plate. The reaction buffer is Tris 2OmM pH 7.4,
4μg/mL calmodulin, 3mM MgCl2, 1.5mM CaCl2, 0.2mg/mL BSA and 0.001% Brij-35. After an incubation of 45 minutes at 37°C, the reaction is stopped by the addition of 50μL BIOMOL GREENTM reagent. After 30 minutes incubation at room temperature, the readout is performed on the Envision
(absorption at 615nm).
[0306] All tested compounds are tested in duplicate starting from 20μM followed by a 1/3 serial dilution, 8 points (20μM - 6.67μM - 2.22μM - 74OnM - 247nM - 82nM - 27nM - 9nM) in a final concentration of 1% DMSO. As the positive dose response control compound Vardenafil is used. For the calculation of z' and PIN values lOμM Vardenafil is used as positive control (100% inhibition) and 1%
DMSO as negative control (0% inhibition).
Exemplary Compounds of the Invention
[0307] The following compounds have been or can be prepared according to the synthetic methods described above. For the purpose of Table 2 below, activity of each compound, which can be determined using the PDElA assay method described in above, is expressed as follows:
"+" IC50 >500 nM
"++" IC50 100 - 50O nM
IC50 0.01 - <100 nM
[0308] TABLE 3: PDElA IC50 Data for Exemplary Compounds
Pat PDElA
IUPAC NAME ID IC50 (nM)
5-(benzyl(3,4-dichlorobenzyl)amino)-l-methyl-3-propyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3- ++ d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
5-((cyclohexylmethyl)(3,4-dichlorobenzyl)amino)-l-methyl-3-propyl-lH- pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
5-((cyclohexylmethyl)((2-morpholinopyridin-4-yl)methyl)amino)-l-methyl-3- +++ propyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
5-((4-methoxybenzyl)(3-morpholinopropyl)amino)-l-methyl-3-propyl-lH- +++ pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
5-((4-fluorobenzyl)(3-morpholinopropyl)amino)-l-methyl-3-propyl-lH- pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
5-((cyclohexylmethyl)(3-(4-methylpiperazin-l-yl)benzyl)amino)-l-methyl-3- +++ propyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
5-(( 1 H-pyrazol- 1 -yl)benzyl)(cyclohexylmethyl)amino)- 1 -methyl-3 -propyl- 1 H- pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
5-(( 1 H-pyrrol- 1 -yl)benzyl)(cyclohexylmethyl)amino)- 1 -methyl- 3 -propyl- 1 H- +++ pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
5-((cyclohexylmethyl)(methyl-lH-pyrazol-3-yl)benzyl)amino)-l-methyl-3-
10 propyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
Pat PDElA
IUPAC NAME ID IC50 (nM)
5-(( IH-1 ,2,4-triazol- 1 -yl)benzyl)(cyclohexylmethyl)amino)- 1 -methyl-3-
11 propyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
5-((3,4-dichlorobenzyl)(4,4,4-trifluorobutyl)amino)-l-methyl-3-propyl-lH-
12 +++ pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
5-((cyclohexylmethyl)((4-methyl-2-phenylthiazol-5-yl)methyl)amino)-l-
13 methyl-3-propyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
5-((cyclohexylmethyl)(3-morpholinobenzyl)amino)-l-methyl-3-propyl-lH-
14 +++ pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
5-((cyclopentylmethyl)(3-morpholinobenzyl)amino)-l-methyl-3-propyl-lH-
15 pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
5-((bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptan-2-ylmethyl)(3-morpholinobenzyl)amino)- 1 -methyl-3-
16 +++ propyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
l-methyl-5-((3-morpholinobenzyl)(2-(tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl)ethyl)amino)-
17 3-propyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
l-methyl-5-((3-morpholinobenzyl)(3-phenylpropyl)amino)-3-propyl-lH-
18 ++ pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
5-((4-fluorobenzyl)((tetrahydrofuran-2-yl)methyl)amino)-l-methyl-3-propyl-
19 ++ lH-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
5-((cyclohexylmethyl)((l-methyl-3-phenyl-lH-pyrazol-5-yl)methyl)amino)-l-
20 methyl-3-propyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
5-((bicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-2-ylmethyl)((4-methyl-2-phenylthiazol-5-
21 +++ yl)methyl)amino)-l-methyl-3-propyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
l-methyl-5-(((4-methyl-2-phenylthiazol-5-yl)methyl)(3-phenylpropyl)amino)-
22 3-propyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
5-((4-chlorophenethyl)(cyclohexylmethyl)amino)-l-methyl-3-propyl-lH-
23 +++ pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
Pat PDElA
IUPAC NAME ID IC50 (nM)
5-((4-chlorophenethyl)(2-(tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl)ethyl)amino)-l-methyl-3-
24 propyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
5-((cyclopentylmethyl)((4-methyl-2-phenylthiazol-5-yl)methyl)amino)-l-
25 +++ methyl-3-propyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
5-((4-fluorobenzyl)(3-isopropoxypropyl)amino)-l-methyl-3-propyl-lH-
27 pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
3-tert-butyl-5-((cyclohexylmethyl)((2-morpholinopyridin-4-yl)methyl)amino)-
28 +++ 1 -methyl- lH-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
3-tert-butyl-5-((4-fluorobenzyl)(3-morpholinopropyl)amino)- 1 -methyl- IH-
29 pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
3-tert-butyl-5-((cyclohexylmethyl)(4-fluorobenzyl)amino)-l -methyl- IH-
30 +++ pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
3-tert-butyl-5-((4-fluorobenzyl)(3-isopropoxypropyl)amino)-l -methyl- IH-
31 pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
5-((cyclohexylmethyl)(4-fluorobenzyl)amino)-3-propyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3-
32 +++ d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
5-((cyclohexylmethyl)(3-morpholinobenzyl)amino)- 1 -ethyl-3 -propyl- IH-
33 ++ pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
5-((cyclohexylmethyl)((2-morpholinopyridin-4-yl)methyl)amino)-3-
34 cyclopentyl- 1 -methyl- lH-pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
3-tert-butyl-5-((cyclohexylmethyl)(3-morpholinobenzyl)amino)-l -methyl- IH-
35 +++ pyrazolo[4,3-d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
5-((cyclohexylmethyl)(3-morpholinobenzyl)amino)-3-propyl-lH-pyrazolo[4,3-
36 d]pyrimidin-7(6H)-one
5-(( 1 H- 1 ,2,4-triazol- 1 -yl)benzyl)(cyclohexylmethyl)amino)-3-tert-butyl- 1 -
2.2 PDElA cellular assay
[0309] As an alternative assay to the in vitro assay described above, a cellular PDElA assay was developed in order to determine PDElA inhibitor activity on cAMP levels in forskolin (NHK477) stimulated HEK293 cells transiently transfected with PDElA with HTRF® (Homogeneous Time- Resolved Fluorescence) cAMP dynamic 2 bulk kit (from Cisbio).
[0310] HEK 293T are routinely maintained in Dulbecco's Modified Eagle's Medium (DMEM) containing 10% heat inactivated fetal calf serum, 100 U/mL Penicillin and 100 μg/ml Streptomycin.
[0311] 70 % confluent HEK 293T are used for reverse transfection that involves simultaneously transfecting and plating cells. 60 000 cells are transiently transfected with lOOng of pcDNA3.1(+)PDElA
DNA using 0.2μL Jet-PEI (Polyplus) as transfection reagent per well for 96 well plate format. Transfected cells are seeded in poly-D-lysine coated 96-well plates. After overnight incubation at 37°C, 10% CO2, transfection medium is removed and 100 μL of cell culture medium are added.
[0312] 48 hour after transfection, the medium is removed, 20μL DMEM is added, then 20 μL of compound dilution in DMEM, 50 mM Hepes (25mM f.c), 2*10~4M Forskolin (10"4M f.c; NHK477; to activate adenylate cyclase) and 2*10~3M Rolipram (10"3M f.c). By pharmacologically inhibiting PDE4 endogenous activity with Rolipram, transiently expressed PDElA becomes the main PDE using cAMP as substrate in transfected HEK293T cells and this allows a specific PDElA readout.
[0313] All compounds are tested in duplicate starting from lOOμM followed by a 1/3 serial dilution, 8 points (lOOμM - 33.3μM - 1 l. lμM - 3.7μM - 1.2μM - 41 InM - 137nM - 46nM - 15nM) in a final concentration of 5% DMSO.
[0314] After Ih incubation at 37°C, cells are lysed by addition of 40μL lysis buffer (50 mM
KH2PO4, 50 mM Na2HPO4, 0.8 M Potassium Fluoride, 0.2 % BSA, 1% Triton-XIOO). Cell lysates are diluted 1/100 (2x 1/10) in lysis buffer.
[0315] Htrf reagents are added to 20μL diluted cell lysate: lOμL cAMP-d2 (cAMP labelled with d2 dye), then lOμL anti cAMP-Cryptate (monoclonal antibody against cAMP, labeled with cryptate). The plates are incubated at room temperature for 1 hour and read on the Envision ((excitation 360nm; emission donor 615nm; emission acceptor 665nm). Results are calculated from the 665nm / 615nm ratio and expressed in Delta F% as described by manufacturer.
[0316] Appropriate positive and negative control may be selected by a person of skill in the art and used to calculate z' and PIN values.
2.3 PDE Selectivity Panel
[0317] In one aspect the compounds of the invention are more potent against PDElA than against other PDE isoforms. In a particular embodiment, the compounds are 2 fold more potent against PDElA than against one or more of the other isoforms. In an alternative embodiment, the compounds of the invention are 5 fold, particularly 10-fold, particularly 20-fold more potent against PDElA than against one or more of the other isoforms of PDE. In particular, the compounds of the invention are more potent against PDElA than against at least one of PDElB, PDE2A, PDE4A or PDE5A. In particular the compounds are more potent against PDElA than against at least two of PDElB, PDE2A, PDE4A or PDE5A. In particular the compounds are more potent against PDElA than against all of the other PDE isoforms. Methods for testing the selectivity of the compounds against a range of PDE isoforms will be familiar to those of skill in the art, and for example, may measure comparative IC50 values or percentage inhibition values at a set concentration. Typical methods are described below.
[0318] To test the selectivity of the compounds against a panel of PDE's, lysate derived from transiently transfected HEK293 cells (transfected with PDE5A, PDElB, PDE2A or PDE4A for 48h) is used as the enzyme source.
[0319] The dose response of compounds on PDE5A lysate is performed using the cGMP bulk htrf kit from Cisbio (catnr 62GM2PEC). The principle of this kit is based on the HTRF® technology (Homogeneous Time-Resolved Fluorescence). The method is based on the competition between native cGMP and the cGMP labeled with d2. The tracer binding is visualized by a monoclonal antibody against cGMP, labeled with Cryptate. The specific signal (i.e. energy transfer) is inversely proportional to the concentration of cGMP in the sample. PDE5A hydro lyses cGMP into 5'GMP; the decrease in cGMP concentration upon PDE5A activity will result in an increased signal. A PDE5A inhibitor will cause a decrease of this signal.
[0320] For the enzymatic reaction, a mix of 20μL with PDE5A lysate, 40OnM cGMP, and the compound is made in a black 384-plate. The reaction buffer consists of Tris 2OmM pH 7.4, 3mM MgCl2, 1.5mM CaCl2, 0.2mg/mL BSA and 0.001% Brij-35. After an incubation of 25 minutes at room temperature, the reaction is stopped by the addition of lOμL labeled cGMP-d2 and 10 μL anti-cGMP- Cryptate. After 1 hour incubation at room temperature, the readout is performed on the Envision (excitation 360nm; emission donor 615nm; emission acceptor 665nm).
[0321] All compounds are tested in duplicate starting from 20μM and 2OnM followed by a 1/3 serial dilution, 8 points (20μM - 6.67μM - 2.22μM - 74OnM - 247nM - 82nM - 27nM - 9nM and 2OnM - 6.67nM - 2.22nM - 74OpM - 247pM - 82pM - 27pM - 9pM) in a final concentration of 1% DMSO. As positive control the compound Vardenafil is also added in dose response. For the calculation of z' and PIN values 1% DMSO is used as positive control (100% inhibition) and lysate in 1% DMSO as negative control (0% inhibition).
[0322] For the single dose screening on PDElB, PDE2A and PDE4A lysates an assay using the cAMP dynamic 2 bulk htrf kit from Cisbio (catnr 62AM4PEC) is used. The principle of this kit is based on the HTRF® technology (Homogeneous Time-Resolved Fluorescence). The method is based on the competition between native cAMP and the cAMP labeled with d2. The tracer binding is visualized by a monoclonal antibody against cAMP, labeled with Cryptate. The specific signal (i.e. energy transfer) is inversely proportional to the concentration of cAMP in the sample.
[0323] For the enzymatic reaction, a mixture is made of 1 OμL with PDE IB, PDE2A or PDE4A lysate, 10OnM cAMP and the compound (5OnM in a final concentration of 1% DMSO) in a black 384- plate. The reaction buffer is Tris 2OmM pH 7.4, 37.5 U/ml calmodulin, 3mM MgCl2, 1.5mM CaCl2, 0.2mg/mL BSA and 0.001% Brij-35®. After an incubation of 25 minutes at room temperature, the reaction is stopped by the addition of 5μL labelled cAMP-d2 and 5 μL anti-cAMP-Cryptate. After 1 hour incubation at room temperature, the readout is performed on the Envision (excitation 360nm; emission donor 615nm; emission acceptor 665nm).
[0324] PDElB, PDE2A and PDE4A hydrolyse cAMP into 5'AMP; this decrease in cAMP concentration will result in an increase in signal. A PDElA, PDE2A or PDE4A inhibitor will result in a decrease of this signal.
[0325] 1% DMSO (100% inhibition) may be used as a positive control, lysate with 1% DMSO
(0% inhibition) may be used as a negative control. The positive and negative control are used to calculate z' and PIN values.
[0326] All compounds may be screened at a single concentration of 5OnM. The hit criteria is set at PIN 50 (50% inhibition).
[0327] It should be understood that factors such as the differential cell penetration capacity of the various compounds can contribute to discrepancies between the activity of the compounds in the in vitro biochemical and cellular assays.
[0328] It will be appreciated by those skilled in the art that the foregoing description is exemplary and explanatory in nature, and is intended to illustrate the invention and its particular embodiments. Through routine experimentation, an artisan will recognise apparent modifications and variations that may be made without departing from the spirit of the invention. Thus, the invention is intended to be defined not by the above description, but by the following claims and their equivalents.
2.4 Development of a high-throughput screening method for the detection of endogenous collagen type II, alpha-1 (col2 al) Principle of the assay:
[0329] The mouse embryonic cell line ATDC5 is a cell line that can be induced to a chondrogenic fate by certain culturing conditions such as high cell density or certain growth factors. Anabolic compounds can be tested in this cell line for their capacity to induce or enhance the chondrogenic differentiation by measuring a typical chondrocyte markers such as collagen type II, alpha- 1 (col2αl), a major constituent of normal cartilage. ATDC5 cells are seeded in 384 well plates and 3 days after plating treated with compounds. Col2αl deposition is determined 14 days after the start of the infection.
Control compounds
[0330] FK506 was described to induce chondrogenic differentiation in ATDC5 cells and increase collagen II production (Nishigaki et al, 2002, Eur J Pharmacol. FK506 induces chondrogenic differentiation of clonal mouse embryonic carcinoma cells, ATDC5). Assay description
[0331] ATDC5 cells are seeded on day 0 at 1000 cells/well in 50 μL of DMEM/F12
(InVitrogen), containing 5% heat-inactivated fetal calf serum, 1% Pen/Strep in a 384-well plate previously coated with a 0.1% solution of gelatin in PBS. After 3 days the medium is replaced by the same medium containing 12.5% cell differentiation medium (CDM, Cell applications) and either 0.1 % DMSO or a compound solution in DMSO such that DMSO levels are 0.1%. At day 7 medium and compound solutions are refreshed, and at day 10 60 μg/mL 2-Phospho-L-ascorbic acid is added. [0332] Up-regulation of Col2al is read at day 13: The medium is removed with a VacuSafe; 50 μL ice-cold MeOH is added and removed immediately by inverting the plate; 50 μL of ice-cold MeOH is added to fix the cells, and plates are incubated for 20 min at -200C; MeOH is removed and plates are air- dried for 20 min, followed by 2x washing with 80 μL of phosphate buffered saline (PBS); 75 μL of
blocking buffer (0.1% casein in PBS) is added and plates are incubated for at least 2 h at room temperature (RT). After the incubation the blocking buffer is removed; cells are washed with 25 μL of
EC buffer (20 mM sodium phosphate, 2mM EDTA, 400 mM NaCl, 0.2% BSA, 0.05% CHAPS, 0.4% casein, 0.05% NaN3, pH 7) and 35 μL of the primary antibody (Collagen II Ab-2, Neomarkers MS-235-P) diluted 1/400 in buffer C (20 mM sodium phosphate, 2 mM EDTA, 400 mM NaCl, 1% BSA, pH 7) is added; plates are incubated overnight at 4°C. After the incubation the primary antibody is removed; cells are washed once with 80 μL of PBST (0.5% Tween 20 in PBS) and once with 80 μLl PBS; 35 μL of the secondary antibody (Goat-anti-mouse Immunoglobulins/HRP. DAKO, P0477; diluted 1/2000 in buffer C) is added; plates are incubated at RT for at least 45min but no longer than 1 h. After this incubation, the secondary antibody is removed and cells are washed twice with 80 μL PBST and once with 80 μL PBS;
50 μL of luminol substrate is added and after 5 minutes read-out is determined on a luminometer.
[0333] It should be understood that factors such as the differential cell penetration capacity of the various compounds can contribute to discrepancies between the activity of the compounds in the in vitro biochemical and cellular assays.
[0334] It will be appreciated by those skilled in the art that the foregoing description is exemplary and explanatory in nature, and is intended to illustrate the invention and its particular embodiments. Through routine experimentation, an artisan will recognise apparent modifications and variations that may be made without departing from the spirit of the invention. Thus, the invention is intended to be defined not by the above description, but by the following claims and their equivalents.
[0335] All publications, patents and patent applications cited in this specification are herein incorporated by reference as if each individual publication or patent application are specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference.
[0336] Although the foregoing invention has been described in some detail by way of illustration and example for purposes of clarity of understanding, it will be readily apparent to those of ordinary skill in the art in light of the teachings of this invention that certain changes and modifications may be made thereto without departing from the spirit or scope of the appended claims. All such modifications coming within the scope of the appended claims are intended to be included therein.
[0337] The chemical names of compounds given in this application were generated using various commercially available chemical naming software tools including MDL's ISIS Draw Autonom Software tool,and were not verified. Particularly, in the event of inconsistency, the depicted structure governs.
[0338] REFERENCES
Andreakos E, et al. (2003). Arthritis Rheum. 48: 1901-12.
Choy EH, Panayi GS. (2001). N Engl J Med. 344: 907-16.
Clegg DO et al. (2006) N Engl J Med. 2006 354:795-808. Glucosamine, chondroitin sulfate, and the two in combination for painful knee osteoarthritis.
Coussens LM, et al. (2002). Science 295: 2387-92.
Creemers EE, et al. (2001). Circ Res. 2001 89:201-10
Cunnane G, et al. (2001). Arthritis Rheum 44: 2263-74.
Edwards J. C. W., Szczepanski L., Szechinski J., Filipowicz-Sosnowska A., Emery P., Close D. R.,
Stevens R. M., Shaw T. (2004) N Engl J Med. 350:2572-2581.
EMBO J. 23:4780-91.
Firestein GS. (2003). Nature. 423:356-61.
Gapski R, et al. (2004). J Periodontal. 75:441-52.
Geng Y, Zhou L, Thompson WJ, Lotz M. (1998) Cyclic GMP and cGMP -binding phosphodiesterase are required for interleukin- 1 -induced nitric oxide synthesis in human articular chondrocytes. J Biol Chem.
273:27484-91.
Gomez-Reino JJ, et al. (2003). Arthritis Rheum. 48: 2122-7.
Goraya TA, Cooper DM. (2005) Ca2+-calmodulin-dependent phosphodiesterase (PDEl): current perspectives. Cell Signal.17:789-97.
Harder K. W. et al. Biochem.J. 1994 398 395
Kakkar R, Raju RV, Sharma RK. (1999) Calmodulin-dependent cyclic nucleotide phosphodiesterase
(PDEl). Cell MoI Life Sci. 55: 1164-86.
Kremer J. M., Westhovens R., Leon M., Di Giorgio E., Alten R., Steinfeld S., Russell A., Dougados M.,
Emery P., Nuamah I. F., Williams G. R., Becker J.-C, Hagerty D. T., Moreland L. W. (2003) N Engl J
Med. 349: 1907-1915.
Lee DM, Weinblatt ME (2001). Lancet. 358: 903-11.
Lugnier C. (2006) Pharmacol Ther. 2006 109:366-98. Review.Cyclic nucleotide phosphodiesterase (PDE) superfamily: a new target for the development of specific therapeutic agents.
Murray F et al. (2006) Am J Physiol Lung Cell MoI Physiol. Expression and Activity of cAMP
Phosphodiesterase Isoforms in Pulmonary Artery Smooth Muscle Cells from Patients with Pulmonary
Hypertension: Role for PDEl. In publication.
New L, Jiang Y, Han J. (2003) Regulation of PRAK subcellular location by p38 MAP kinases. MoI Biol
Cell. 14(6):2603-16.
O1DeU JR, Leff R, Paulsen G, Haire C, Mallek J, Eckhoff PJ, Fernandez A, Blakely K, Wees S, Stoner J,
Hadley S, Felt J, Palmer W, Waytz P, Churchill M, Klassen L, Moore G. (2002) Arthritis Rheum.
46: 1164-70.
O'Dell JR. (2004) Therapeutic strategies for rheumatoid arthritis. N Engl J Med. 350(25):2591-602.
Reed TM et al. (2002) Phosphodiesterase IB knock-out mice exhibit exaggerated locomotor hyperactivity and DARPP-32 phosphorylation in response to dopamine agonists and display impaired spatial learning. J
Neurosci. 22:5188-97.
Reif S, Somech R, Brazovski E, Reich R, Belson A, Konikoff FM, Kessler A. (2005) Digestion. 71: 124-
130.
Rosenberg GA. (2002). GHa. 39:279-91.
S. A. Beers et al. Bioorg.Med.Chem. 1997 5 2203
Schanstra JP, et al. (2002). J Clin Invest. 110:371-9.
Seternes OM, Mikalsen T, Johansen B, Michaelsen E, Armstrong CG, Morrice NA, Turgeon B, Meloche
S, Moens U, Keyse SM. (2004) Activation of MK5/PRAK by the atypical MAP kinase ERK3 defines a novel signal transduction pathway.
Shi Y, Kotlyarov A, Laabeta K, Gruber AD, Butt E, Marcus K, Meyer HE, Friedrich A, VoIk HD, Gaestel
M. (2003) Elimination of protein kinase MK5/PRAK activity by targeted homologous recombination. MoI
Cell Biol. 23:7732-41.
Smolen JS, Steiner G. (2003). Nat Rev Drug Discov. 2: 473-88.
St Clair EW, van der Heijde DM, Smolen JS, Maini RN, Bathon JM, Emery P, Keystone E, Schiff M,
Kalden JR, Wang B, Dewoody K, Weiss R, Baker D; (2004) Combination of infliximab and methotrexate therapy for early rheumatoid arthritis: a randomized, controlled trial. Arthritis Rheum. 50 :3432-43.
Suzuki R, et al. (2004). Treat Respir Med. 3: 17-27.
Tenor H, Hedbom E, Hauselmann HJ, Schudt C, Hatzelmann A. Phosphodiesterase isoenzyme families in human osteoarthritis chondrocytes— functional importance of phosphodiesterase 4. Br J Pharmacol. (2002)
135:609-18.
Wieland HA, Michaelis M, Kirschbaum BJ, Rudolphi KA. (2005). Nat Rev Drug Discov. 4:331-44.
Osteoarthritis - an untreatable disease?
Zhang KY et al. (2004) A glutamine switch mechanism for nucleotide selectivity by phosphodiesterases.
MoI Cell. 2004 15:279-86.
Claims
1. A compound according to formula I:
I wherein:
CyI is substituted or unsubstituted aryl or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl;
R1 is H, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl;
R2 is H, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkylalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl;
R4 is alkyl substituted with halo, alkoxy, aryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl; and ml is 0,
1,
2, 3, or 4; provided that when CyI is heterocycloalkyl and the heterocycloalkyl group is joined to -(CH2)ml- via a N atom of heterocycloalkyl group then ml is 2, 3 or 4; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate or prodrug thereof or isotopic variants thereof, stereoisomers or tautomers thereof.
The compound according to claim 1 of formulae Ia or Ib:
Ar is substituted or unsubstituted aryl; and HetAr is substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl.
3. The compound according to claim 2 wherein R1 is H or alkyl.
4. The compound according to claim 2 wherein R1 is methyl, ethyl or i-Pr.
5. The compound according to claim 2 wherein ml is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4.
6. The compound according to claim 2 wherein ml is 1, 2 or 3.
7. The compound according to claim 2 of formula Ia.
Ar is substituted or unsubstituted phenyl;
R2 and R4 are as in claim 1.
9. The compound according to claim 8 wherein Ar is phenyl unsubstituted or substituted with one or more groups selected from alkyl, halo, haloalkyl, and alkoxy.
10. The compound according to claim 8 wherein Ar is phenyl substituted with cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl.
11. The compound according to claim 1 of formulae Ilia or IHb:
R3b
Ilia 1Mb wherein:
R2 and R4 are as in claim 1 ; and each of R3b and R3c is independently H, alkyl, halo, haloalkyl, or alkoxy.
12. The compound according to claim 11 wherein one of R3b and R3c is Me, F, Cl, CF3, OMe, or OEt and the other is H.
13. The compound according to claim 11 wherein both R3b and R3c are independently F, Cl, OMe, CF3, or OEt.
14. The compound according to claim 1 of formulae IVa or IVb:
IVa IVb wherein:
R2 and R4 are as in claim 1 ; and
R3b is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, heterocycloalkyl or heteroaryl.
15. The compound according to claim 14 wherein R3b is selected from substituted or unsubstituted piperidinyl, piperazinyl, and morpholinyl.
16. The compound according to claim 14 wherein R3b is selected from substituted or unsubstituted pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, isoxazolyl and oxazolyl.
17. The compound according to claim 14 wherein R3b is selected from substituted or unsubstituted pyridyl, and pyrimidinyl.
18. The compound according to claim 1 of formulae Va, Vb, Vc, Vd, Ve, Vf, Vg, and Vh:
Va Vb Vc
Vd Vf
Ve
Vh
Vg
wherein R2 and R4 are as in claim 1.
19. The compound according to any one of claims 1-18 wherein R4 is alkyl substituted with halo, alkoxy, aryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl.
20. The compound according to any one of claims 1-18 wherein R4 is alkyl substituted with halo or alkoxy.
21. The compound according to any one of claims 1-18 wherein R4 is alkyl substituted with Cl, F,
OMe, or O-i-Pr.
22. The compound according to any one of claims 1-18 wherein R4 is 4,4,4-trifluoro-n-butyl.
23. The compound according to any one of claims 1-18 wherein R4 is 3-methoxy-n-propyl, or 3- isopropoxy-n-propyl.
24. Thecompound according to any one of claims 1-18 wherein R4 is alkyl substituted with cycloalkyl.
25. The compound according to any one of claims 1-18 wherein R4 is alkyl substituted with cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl or cyclohexyl.
26. The compound according to any one of claims 1-18 wherein R4 is cyclopropylmethyl, cyclopentylmethyl or cyclohexylmethyl.
27. The compound according to any one of claims 1-18 wherein R4 is alkyl substituted with heterocycloalkyl.
28. The compound according to any one of claims 1-18 wherein R4 is alkyl substituted with piperidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydropyranyl, or morpholinyl.
29. The compound according to any one of claims 1-18 wherein R4 is 2-(morpholin- 1 -yl)ethyl, 3- (morpholin- 1 -yl)propyl, 2-(tetrahydropyran-4-yl)ethyl, or (tetrahydrofuran-2-yl)methyl.
30. The compound according to claim 1 wherein the compound is according to formulae Via, VIb, VIc, VId, VIe, VIf, VIg, and VIh:
wherein R2 is as in claim 1.
31. The compound according to claim 2 of formula Ib.
VIIc wherein:
HetAr is substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl;
R2 and R4 are as in claim 1.
33. The compound according to claim 32 wherein HetAr is pyridyl unsubstituted or substituted with one or more groups selected from alkyl, halo, haloalkyl, and alkoxy.
34. The compound according to claim 32 wherein HetAr is pyridyl substituted with cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl.
35. The compound according to claim 32 of formula Villa or VIIIb:
R2 and R4 are as in claim 1 ; and each of R3b and R3c is independently H, alkyl, halo, haloalkyl, or alkoxy.
36. The compound according to claim 35 wherein one of R3b and R3c is Me, F, Cl, CF3, OMe, or OEt and the other is H.
37. The compound according to claim 35 wherein both R3b and R3c are independently F, Cl, OMe, CF3, or OEt.
IXa IXb wherein:
R2 and R4 are as in claim 1 ; and
R3b is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, heterocycloalkyl or heteroaryl.
39. The compound according to claim 38 wherein R3b is selected from substituted or unsubstituted piperidinyl, piperazinyl, and morpholinyl.
40. The compound according to claim 38 wherein R3b is selected from substituted or unsubstituted pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, isoxazolyl and oxazolyl.
41. The compound according to claim 38 wherein R3b is selected from substituted or unsubstituted pyridyl, and pyrimidinyl.
42. The compound according to claim 1 of formula Xa, Xb, Xc, Xd, Xe, Xf, Xg, and Xh:
IXa IXb IXc
IXd IXf
IXe
IXh
IXg wherein R2 and R4 are as in claim 1.
XIg XIh
wherein R2 and R4 are as in claim 1.
44. The compound according to claim 32 wherein HetAr is selected from substituted or unsubstituted pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, isoxazolyl, and oxazolyl.
45. The compound according to claim 32 wherein HetAr is selected from pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiazolyl, isoxazolyl, and oxazolyl; substituted with one or more groups selected from Ci-Ce alkyl, halo, haloalkyl, and phenyl.
46. The compound according to claim 45 wherein the HetAr is mono substituted and the substitution is selected from Ph, Me, CF3, and halo.
47. The compound according to claim 45 wherein the HetAr is di substituted and the substitution is selected from Ph, Me and CF3.
48. The compound according to claim 1 of formulae XIIa, XIIb, XIIc, XIId, and XIIe:
XIIe
XlId wherein R and R are as in claim 1 ; and R is H, alkyl or haloalkyl.
49. The compound according to claim 44 wherein R3d is Me.
50. The compound according to any one of claims 32-49 wherein R4 is alkyl substituted with halo, alkoxy, aryl, cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl.
51. The compound according to any one of claims 32-49 wherein R4 is alkyl substituted with halo or alkoxy.
52. The compound according to any one of claims 32-49 wherein R4 is alkyl substituted with Cl, F,
OMe, or O-i-Pr.
53. The compound according to any one of claims 32-49 wherein R4 is 4,4,4-trifluoro-n-butyl.
54. The compound according to any one of claims 32-49 wherein R4 is 3-methoxy-n-propyl, or 3- isopropoxy-n-propyl.
55. The compound according to any one of claims 32-49 wherein R4 is alkyl substituted with cycloalkyl.
56. The compound according to any one of claims 32-49 wherein R4 is alkyl substituted with cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl or cyclohexyl.
57. The compound according to any one of claims 32-49 wherein R4 is cyclopropylmethyl, cyclopentylmethyl or cyclohexylmethyl.
58. The compound according to any one of claims 32-49 wherein R4 is alkyl substituted with heterocycloalkyl.
59. The compound according to any one of claims 32-49 wherein R4 is alkyl substituted with piperidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydropyranyl, or morpholinyl.
60. The compound according to any one of claims 32-49 wherein R4 is 2-(morpholin- 1 -yl)ethyl, 3- (morpholin- 1 -yl)propyl, 2-(tetrahydropyran-4-yl)ethyl, or (tetrahydrofuran-2-yl)methyl.
61. The compound according to claim 1 of formulae XIIIa, XIIIb, XIIIc, XIIId, and XIIIe:
62. The compound according to any one of claims 2-61 wherein R2 is Me, Et, n-Pr, t-Bu, cyclopropyl, cyclohexyl, or cyclopentyl.
63. The compound according to any one of claims 2-61 wherein R2 is t-Bu.
64. The compound according to any one of claims 2-61 wherein R2 is phenyl or substituted phenyl.
65. The compound according to any one of claims 2-61 wherein R2 is pyridyl.
66. The compound according to claim 1 wherein the compound is selected from Table 1. or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate or prodrug thereof or isotopic variants thereof, stereoisomers or tautomers thereof.
67. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and a pharmaceutically effective amount of a compound of any of the preceding claims.
68. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 67, wherein the carrier is a parenteral carrier.
69. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 67, wherein the carrier is an oral carrier.
70. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 67, wherein the carrier is a topical carrier.
71. Use of a compound according to any one of claims 1 to 66, in the manufacture of a medicament for treatment or prophylaxis of a condition characterized by cartilage or joint degradation.
72. Use of a compound according to any one of claims 1 to 66, in the manufacture of a medicament for treatment or prophylaxis of a condition selected from diseases involving inflammation.
73. Use according to claim 72, wherein said disease is rheumatoid arthritis.
74. Use according to either of claims 71 or 72, wherein said disease is osteoarthritis.
75. A method of treatment or prophylaxis of a disease associated with bone and/or involving degradation of cartilage, which comprises administering a therapeutically effective a compound according to any one of claims 1 to 66, or a pharmaceutical composition according to any of claims 67 to 70.
76. A method of treatment or prevention of osteoarthritis, which comprises administering to a subject in need thereof, a therapeutically effective amount of a compound according to any one of claims 1 to 66, or a pharmaceutical composition according to any of claims 67 to 72.
77. A method of treatment or prevention of rheumatoid arthritis, which comprises administering to a subject in need thereof, a therapeutically effective amount of a compound according to any one of claims 1 to 66, or a pharmaceutical composition according to any of claims 67 to 72.
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| US585907P | 2007-12-07 | 2007-12-07 | |
| US61/005,859 | 2007-12-07 |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2009071706A1 true WO2009071706A1 (en) | 2009-06-11 |
Family
ID=40551096
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/EP2008/067047 Ceased WO2009071706A1 (en) | 2007-12-07 | 2008-12-08 | Pyrazolepyrimidine compounds useful for the treatment of degenerative & inflammatory diseases |
Country Status (1)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| WO (1) | WO2009071706A1 (en) |
Citations (4)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| EP0201188A2 (en) * | 1985-04-05 | 1986-12-17 | Warner-Lambert Company | 5-Substituted pyrazolo[4,3-d] pyrimidine-7-ones, process for preparing the compounds and pharmaceutical compositions comprising the compounds |
| US5294612A (en) * | 1992-03-30 | 1994-03-15 | Sterling Winthrop Inc. | 6-heterocyclyl pyrazolo [3,4-d]pyrimidin-4-ones and compositions and method of use thereof |
| WO2008055959A1 (en) * | 2006-11-09 | 2008-05-15 | Galapagos N.V. | Novel compounds useful for the treatment of degenerative & inflammatory diseases |
| WO2008071650A2 (en) * | 2006-12-11 | 2008-06-19 | Galapagos N.V. | Novel compounds useful for the treatment of degenerative & inflammatory diseases |
-
2008
- 2008-12-08 WO PCT/EP2008/067047 patent/WO2009071706A1/en not_active Ceased
Patent Citations (4)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| EP0201188A2 (en) * | 1985-04-05 | 1986-12-17 | Warner-Lambert Company | 5-Substituted pyrazolo[4,3-d] pyrimidine-7-ones, process for preparing the compounds and pharmaceutical compositions comprising the compounds |
| US5294612A (en) * | 1992-03-30 | 1994-03-15 | Sterling Winthrop Inc. | 6-heterocyclyl pyrazolo [3,4-d]pyrimidin-4-ones and compositions and method of use thereof |
| WO2008055959A1 (en) * | 2006-11-09 | 2008-05-15 | Galapagos N.V. | Novel compounds useful for the treatment of degenerative & inflammatory diseases |
| WO2008071650A2 (en) * | 2006-12-11 | 2008-06-19 | Galapagos N.V. | Novel compounds useful for the treatment of degenerative & inflammatory diseases |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| JP7677983B2 (en) | PGDH inhibitors and methods of making and using same | |
| US20090137549A1 (en) | Novel compounds useful for the treatment of degenerative & inflamatory diseases | |
| US20080242661A1 (en) | Novel compounds useful for the treatment of degenerative & inflammatory diseases | |
| AU2010271270C1 (en) | Substituted pyrazolo[1,5-a]pyrimidine compounds as Trk kinase inhibitors | |
| CA2823969C (en) | 2,4-diamino-6,7-dihydro-5h-pyrrolo[2,3]pyrimidine derivatives as fak/pyk2 inhibitors | |
| WO2019150305A1 (en) | Substituted quinazoline and pyridopyrimidine derivatives useful as anticancer agents | |
| KR101478889B1 (en) | Pyrazolopyrimidine compounds and their use as pde10 inhibitors | |
| EP2320895A2 (en) | Cdk modulators | |
| WO2008138842A1 (en) | Imidazopyrazines and triazolopyrazine for the treatment of joint degenerative and inflammatory diseases | |
| WO2008138843A1 (en) | Imidazopyridines and triazolopyrimidines useful for the treatment of joint degenerative & inflammatory diseases | |
| EP3157925A1 (en) | Imidazo-pyridazne derivatives as casein kinase 1 delta/epsilon inhibitors | |
| CN112584898B (en) | P2X3 receptor antagonist | |
| TW201801729A (en) | Certain protein kinase inhibitors | |
| TW201639845A (en) | Novel heteroaryl and heterocycle compounds, compositions and methods | |
| WO2023241322A1 (en) | Heterocyclic derivatives, compositions and uses thereof | |
| CN119731177A (en) | Tricyclic heterocyclic derivative, composition and application thereof | |
| WO2024230578A1 (en) | Cyclic derivatives, compositions and uses thereof | |
| WO2023226964A1 (en) | Heterocyclic derivatives, compositions and uses thereof | |
| JP2011519897A (en) | Fusion pyrazine compounds useful for the treatment of degenerative and inflammatory diseases | |
| WO2006046135A2 (en) | Pyrazolo[4,3-d] pyrimidine derivatives useful as pde-5 inhibitors | |
| WO2009071707A1 (en) | Novel compounds useful for the treatment of degenerative & inflammatory diseases | |
| TW202448888A (en) | Tricyclic heterocyclic derivatives, compositions and uses thereof | |
| WO2009071705A1 (en) | Pyrazolepyrimidine compounds useful for the treatment of degenerative & inflammatory diseases | |
| WO2009071706A1 (en) | Pyrazolepyrimidine compounds useful for the treatment of degenerative & inflammatory diseases | |
| WO2021239727A1 (en) | 4-(7h-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)-3,6-dihydropyridine-1-(2h)-carboxamide derivatives as limk and/or rock kinases inhibitors for use in the treatment of cancer |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 08856088 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
| NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
| 122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 08856088 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |